FANUC Series 16*-LB

FANUC Series 160*-LB

CONNECTION MANUAL

B-63663EN/01
 • No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.

The export of this product is subject to the authorization of the government of the country
from where the product is exported.

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as ”impossible”.

This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of
which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not
followed by  or  in the main body.
B-63663EN/01 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and
preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into
Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also,
supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning,
Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being
injured or when there is a damage of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if
the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment
being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.

NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary
information other than Warning and Caution.

* Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

s-1
B-64663EN/01 PREFACE

PREFACE
About this manual
"Connection Manual (Hardware) (B-63523EN)" and "Connection
Manual (Function) (B-63523EN-1)" for Series 16i/160i-MODEL B
and this manual are provided to design a laser processing machine.
The "Hardware" and "Function" connection manuals provide general
connection information relating to the configuration of a processing
system.
FANUC Series 16i/160i-LB CONNECTION MANUAL provides
supplementary information about the laser functions which are not
explained in the above two connection manuals ("Hardware" and
"Function").

Specification
Manual name
number
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-63523EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-63523EN-1
FANUC Series 16i/160i-LB CONNECTION MANUAL B-63663EN *

In addition to the above connection manuals, laser oscillator manuals

are available. Refer to these manuals as necessary.

The laser functions are explained as described below.

1. Overview
This section outlines the various functions. For details, refer to
the operator's manual as necessary.
2. Signals
Explains the names, functions, output conditions, and signal
addresses of the signals required to implement each function.
3. Parameters
Explains the parameters related to each function.
4. Alarms and messages
Lists the alarms and messages related to each function.
5. Reference
Lists the related manuals and items.

An address list and signal list are provided in the appendixes of this
manual. Refer to these appendixes as necessary.

p-1
PREFACE B-64663EN/01

Applicable product
This manual explains the following product. In the manual, the
following abbreviation may be used.

Product name Abbreviations

FANUC Series 16i-LB 16i-LB
FANUC Series 160i-LB 160i-LB

- Representation of bit type and bit-axis type parameters

Data No. Data (#0 to #7 indicate bit positions.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC

- Representation of parameters other than bit type and bit-axis type parameters
Data No. Data

1023

p-2
B-64663EN/01 PREFACE

Related manuals of Series Series 16i/160i-LB

The following table lists the manuals related to Series 16i-LB, Series
160i-LB. This manual is indicated by an asterisk (*).

Related manuals of Series Series Series 16i/160i-LB

Specification
Manual name
number
Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is-
B-63522EN
MODEL B DESCRIPTIONS
Series 16i/160i-LBDESCRIPTIONS B-63662EN
Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is-
B-63523EN
MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)
Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is-
B-63523EN-1
MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
Series 16i/160i-LBCONNECTION MANUAL B-63663EN *
Series 16i/160i-LBOPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63664EN
Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is-
B-63525EN
MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Series 16i/160i-LBMAINTENANCE MANUAL B-63665EN
Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is- MODEL B
B-63530EN
PARAMETER MANUAL
Series 16i/160i-LBPARAMETER MANUAL B-63670EN
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Macro Compiler/Macro Executor PROGRAMMING
B-61803E-1
MANUAL
C Language Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-62443EN-3
FANUC MACRO COMPILER (For Personal Computer)
B-66102E
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
PMC
PMC Ladder Language PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-61863E
PMC C Language PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-61863E-1
Network
I/O Link-II OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-62714EN
PROFIBUS-DP Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-62924EN
FAST Ethernet Board/FAST DATA SERVER
B-63644EN
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
Ethernet Board/DATA SERVER Board OPERATOR'S
B-63354EN
MANUAL
DeviceNet Board OPERATOR'S MANUAL B-63404EN
PC function
Screen Display Function OPERATOR'S MANUAL B-63164EN

p-3
PREFACE B-64663EN/01

Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR αi/βi series

The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR
αi/βi series.
Specification
Manual name
number
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis series
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series B-65262EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series
B-65272EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βis series
B-65302EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi series
B-65312EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series
B-65282EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER βi series
B-65322EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC SERVO MOTOR αis series
FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series B-65285EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FANUC SERVO MOTOR βis series
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi series
B-65325EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER βi series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βi series B-65270EN
PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi series B-65280EN
PARAMETER MANUAL

p-4
B-64663EN/01 PREFACE

Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR α series

The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR α
series.
Specification
Manual name
number
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series DESCRIPTIONS B-65142E
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series
B-65150E
PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series DESCRIPTIONS B-65152E
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series
B-65160E
PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER α series
B-65162E
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC SERVO MOTOR α series
B-65165E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Either of the following servo motors and the corresponding spindle

can be connected to the CNC covered in this manual.
• FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series
• FANUC SERVO MOTOR α series
This manual mainly assumes that the FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi
series of servo motor is used. For servo motor and spindle information,
refer to the manuals for the servo motor and spindle that are actually
connected.

p-5
B-63663EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE .................................s-1

PREFACE ....................................................................................................p-1

I. HARDWARE
1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................. 3
1.1 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN Series 16i-LB AND Series 16i........................... 4
1.2 CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN LASER SERIES AND SOFTWARE
SERIES ......................................................................................................... 4
2 CONFIGURATION .................................................................................. 5
3 CONTROL UNIT...................................................................................... 6
3.1 CONFIGURATION OF THE CONTROL UNIT............................................... 7
4 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM.......................................................... 9
4.1 FOR C SERIES AND Y SERIES OSCILLATORS ....................................... 10
5 POWER SUPPLY.................................................................................. 15
5.1 CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY ............................................................ 16
5.2 POWER CAPACITY AND HEATING VALUE OF THE ANALOG INPUT
BOARD........................................................................................................ 17
6 I/O LIMITATION BASED ON LASER OSCILLATOR CONNECTION .. 18
7 LASER OSCILLATOR .......................................................................... 19
7.1 CONNECTION OF THE LASER OSCILLATOR .......................................... 20
7.1.1 Connection of the CP1A.........................................................................................21
7.2 LASER OSCILLATOR CONNECTION USING AN OPTICAL FIBER
CABLE......................................................................................................... 22
7.3 ASSIST GAS PRESSURE ANALOG OUTPUT ........................................... 24
7.4 CONNECTION OF THE TRACING SENSOR ............................................. 26

II. LASER FUNCTION

1 FUNCTIONS.......................................................................................... 29
2 FUNCTIONS DIFFERING FROM THE M SERIES SPECIFICATIONS. 38
2.1 EMERGENCY STOP................................................................................... 39
2.2 FEED HOLD ................................................................................................ 39
2.3 TEST OPERATION ..................................................................................... 40
c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63663EN/01

2.3.1 Machine Lock.........................................................................................................40

2.3.2 Dry Run ..................................................................................................................40
2.3.3 Single Block ...........................................................................................................41
2.4 PROGRAM RESTART (LASER SPECIFICATIONS)................................... 42
3 LASER SEQUENCE CONTROL........................................................... 45
3.1 SEQUENCE CONTROL OF THE C SERIES AND Y SERIES LASER
OSCILLATORS............................................................................................ 46
4 ASSIST GAS ......................................................................................... 54
4.1 ASSIST GAS CONTROL............................................................................. 55
4.2 ASSIST GAS PRESSURE ANALOG OUTPUT ........................................... 63
4.3 ASSIST GAS PRESSURE OVERRIDE ....................................................... 65
5 LASER OUTPUT CONTROL ................................................................ 66
5.1 SHUTTER OPENING/CLOSING CONTROL............................................... 67
5.2 BEAM ON/OFF CONTROL ......................................................................... 70
5.3 OUTPUT OVERRIDE .................................................................................. 74
5.3.1 Power Override Signal ...........................................................................................74
5.3.2 Frequency Override Signal.....................................................................................75
5.3.3 Duty Override.........................................................................................................76
5.4 CHANGING THE PIERCING TIME ............................................................. 77
5.5 GUIDE LIGHT ON SIGNAL ......................................................................... 80
5.6 STATE OUTPUT SIGNAL ........................................................................... 81
5.6.1 Piercing Signal .......................................................................................................81
5.6.2 Laser Processing Signal..........................................................................................82
5.6.3 Output Drop Alarm Signal .....................................................................................83
5.6.4 Laser Alarm Signal.................................................................................................84
5.6.5 Laser Oscillator Not Connected Signal ..................................................................85

6 TRACING CONTROL............................................................................ 86
6.1 TRACING CONTROL .................................................................................. 87
6.1.1 Tracing Function ....................................................................................................87
6.1.2 Tracing Control Adjustment...................................................................................91
6.1.3 Standard Shift .........................................................................................................95
6.1.4 Approach ................................................................................................................97
6.1.5 Tracing Alarm ........................................................................................................99
6.1.6 Tracing Gain Override..........................................................................................102
6.2 TRACING INTERLOCK SIGNAL ............................................................... 103
6.3 TRACING AXIS MACHINE LOCK ............................................................. 105
c-2
B-63663EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

7 THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM ................................. 106

7.1 ATTITUDE CONTROL............................................................................... 107
7.1.1 Attitude Control A (Zero-offset Head).................................................................108
7.1.2 Attitude Control B (Offset Nozzle) ......................................................................112
7.2 TEACHING BOX INTERFACE .................................................................. 124
7.3 W-AXIS TRACING..................................................................................... 151
7.4 TRACING AXIS SWITCHING .................................................................... 154
7.5 APPROACH FEED .................................................................................... 155
7.6 PROXIMITY POINT SEARCH FUNCTION................................................ 156
7.7 MANUAL OPERATION IN HAND COORDINATE SYSTEM...................... 161
8 CONTROL FUNCTION........................................................................ 164
8.1 OPTICAL PATH LENGTH COMPENSATION ........................................... 165
8.2 MACHINING CONDITION SETTING FUNCTION ..................................... 172
8.3 PIERCING FUNCTION.............................................................................. 182
8.4 EDGE MACHINE FUNCTION.................................................................... 185
8.5 START-UP FUNCTION ............................................................................. 191
8.6 RETRY PROCESSING FUNCTION .......................................................... 194
8.7 LASER POWER CONTROL ...................................................................... 207
8.8 LASER GAS MIXER FUNCTION............................................................... 214
8.9 REFLECTION BEAM MONITOR FUNCTION............................................ 220
8.10 PULSE ENHANCED FUNCTION .............................................................. 221
8.11 AI CONTOUR CONTROL.......................................................................... 222

APPENDIX
A INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC (FOR C SERIES AND Y
SERIES LASER) ................................................................................. 243
A.1 LIST OF ADDRESSES .............................................................................. 244
A.2 LIST OF SIGNALS..................................................................................... 246
A.2.1 List of Signals (In Order of Functions) ................................................................246
A.2.2 List of Signals (In Order of Symbols) ..................................................................248
A.2.3 List of Signals (In Order of Addresses)................................................................250

c-3
I. HARDWARE
B-64663EN/01 HARDWARE 1.OVERVIEW

1 OVERVIEW

-3-
1.OVERVIEW HARDWARE B-64663EN/01

1.1 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN Series 16i-LB AND Series 16i

Configure the Series 16i-LB system by making connections as

described in the "Series 16i-B Connection Manual."
For an explanation of the differences between the Series 16i-LB and
Series 16i, refer to this manual as necessary.

1.2 CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN LASER SERIES AND

SOFTWARE SERIES

The FANUC laser series includes the C series, Y series, and YP series.
The correspondence between the laser series and the software series
are shown below.

Laser series Oscillator type Software series

C series CO2 laser B8H1 series
Y series Continuous output YAG laser B8H1 series
YP series Pulse output YAG laser Not supported

-4-
B-64663EN/01 HARDWARE 2.CONFIGURATION

2 CONFIGURATION

Host computer
Heat
exchanger
Relay connector

Manual pulse generator

MDI unit I/O device

Operator's panel Machine

Control unit I/O module etc. operator's
panel

Connector panel I/O Power

24 VDC module, I/O unit, etc. magnetics
power Sensor/actuator
(Note 1) circuit
supply

Servo amplifier (Note 2)

Servo motor

Multi-tap
transformer
Laser oscillator

Power supply
Distribution
board

NOTE
1 For information about the I/O unit, refer to the "FANUC I/O Unit-MODEL A
Connection and Maintenance Manual (B-61813E)" and "FANUC I/O Unit-MODEL
B Connection Manual (B-62163E)."
2 For an explanation of the connection between the amplifier and motor, refer to the
following manuals:
• FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series Descriptions (B-65142E)
• FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER α series Descriptions (B-65162E)
-5-
3.CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64663EN/01

3 CONTROL UNIT

-6-
B-64663EN/01 HARDWARE 3.CONTROL UNIT

3.1 CONFIGURATION OF THE CONTROL UNIT

Serial communication board Loader control board Motherboard

Remote buffer Loader control function CPU for controlling CNC
/DNC1/DNC2/HDLC - 2/4-axis control - Power supply
- 2-axis to 8-axis control
- LCD/MDI
C language board - I/O Link
Data server board
- PMC-SB7
C language functions for PMC
Data server function - Analog output/
high-speed DI
- RS-232C × 2
- Memory card interface
Analog input board RISC board
High-precision contour control
Tracing function function

Basic system
HSSB interface board
High-speed serial bus
interface (for Series 160i only)

Various network boards

- I/O Link-II board

- Ethernet board
- PROFIBUS-DP board
- DeviceNetTM board

Options

The following units, which have zero to four

option slots, are provided.
- Unit without option slots
- Unit having two option slots
- Unit having three option slots
- Unit having four option slots

A unit with one or more option slots can have the same number of option boards installed as option slots.
(However, there are mounting conditions for each option board. See the provided option mounting conditions.)

Fig. 3.1 (a) Summary of the LCD-mounted type control unit (Series 16i/160i)

-7-
3.CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64663EN/01

3-slot rack Slot 0 1-slot rack

Option slot 2 Option slot 1

Mini slot 10
Mini slot 12 Mini slot 10

Mini slot 9
Mini slot 11 Mini slot 9

Option (mini slots) Option Basic system (slot 1)

HSSB interface board RISC board Main board
High-speed serial bus interface (16i/18i only)
CPU for CNC control
C language board High-precision contour - Power supply
control function - Axis control
C language functions for PMC - LCD/MDI control
- I/O Link control
Serial communication board Data server board - PMC control
Remote buffer/DNC1/DNC2 - Analog output/high-speed DI
Data server function control
- Serial communication board
Various network boards (RS-232C)
- I/O Link board Loader control - Memory card interface
- Ethernet board board
- PROFIBUS-DP board Loader control
- DeviceNetTM board function

Analog input board

Tracing function (Note 1) In this section, the descriptions about 16i apply to 160i.

Fig. 3.1 (b) Summary of the stand-alone type control unit

-8-
B-64663EN/01 HARDWARE 4.TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

4 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

-9-
4.TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM HARDWARE B-64663EN/01

4.1 FOR C SERIES AND Y SERIES OSCILLATORS

LCD-mounted type control unit (except 160i with PC)

Motherboard
LCD

24 VDC power

Soft key cable

RS-232C I/O device

RS-232C I/O device
Touch panel
Assist gas pressure analog output
High-speed skip input

Distributed Manual pulse generator

I/O board

Operator's
panel

Distributed Power
I/O board, magnetics
I/O unit, etc. cabinet

Laser
oscillator

Circuit breaker

AC reactor
Circuit breaker

Axis 1 servo motor

Axis 2 servo motor

Axis 3 servo motor

Axis 4 servo motor

See 7.1.2.2.

The maximum number of control axes depends on the model. (This figure assumes the use
of the single-axis amplifier.)
Separate detector interface unit 1
Linear scale, axis 1
Linear scale, axis 2
Linear scale, axis 3
Linear scale, axis 4
Absolute scale battery
(Required only when using the absolute scale.)
Separate detector interface unit 2
Linear scale, axis 1
Linear scale, axis 2
Linear scale, axis 3
Linear scale, axis 4

Servo check board

- 10 -
B-64663EN/01 HARDWARE 4.TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

LCD-mounted type control unit (when the option function is provided)

Serial communication
Optional slot

board
Remote buffer board
DNC1 board
DNC2 board

RS-232C I/O device

(when the remote buffer board or DNC2 board is used)

RS-422 I/O device

(when the remote buffer board or DNC1 board is used)

Analog option board

Tracing sensor

Assist gas pressure analog output

- 11 -
4.TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM HARDWARE B-64663EN/01

LCD-mounted type control unit (when the option function is provided)

Circuit breaker
Optional slot

Loader control board

AC rector

Circuit breaker

Loader axis 1
servo motor

Loader axis 2
servo motor

Loader axis 3
servo motor

Loader axis 4
servo motor

(This figure assumes the use of the single-axis amplifier.)

Loader control servo check board

Distributed I/O
board
Operator's panel
for loader control

Distributed I/O Power magnetics

board, I/O unit, cabinet
etc.

Data server board

ATA flash card

HSSB board
(When connection to PANEL i is made via
the HSSB interface, the model name is the
or 160i.)

- 12 -
B-64663EN/01 HARDWARE 4.TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

Stand-alone type control unit

Main board
Slot 0

24 VDC power
The SOFT KEY cable is
To I/O device etc. connected to the LCD control
printed circuit board.

Optical fiber cable

Memory card
(Touch panel)
RS-232C I/O device

RS-232C I/O device

Assist gas pressure analog output

High-speed skip input
Distributed Manual pulse generator
I/O board

Operator's
panel

Distributed Power
I/O board, magnetics
I/O unit, etc. cabinet

β amplifier
Servo motor
with I/O Link .

Laser
oscillator

Detachable LCD/MDI

MDI unit

Circuit breaker

AC reactor

Circuit breaker

Servo card

Optical fiber
cable
Axis 1 servo motor

Axis 2 servo motor

Axis 3 servo motor

Axis 4 servo motor

*1

Up to six or eight axes, depending on the model (This figure assumes the use of the single-axis amplifier.)

Separate detector interface unit 1

Linear scale, axis 1
Linear scale, axis 2
Linear scale, axis 3
Linear scale, axis 4
Absolute scale battery
(Required only when using the absolute scale.)
Separate detector
interface unit 2 *1） Refer to Subsection 7.1.2.2 of the "FANUC
Servo check board Series 16i-MODEL B Connection Manual:
Hardware" (B-63523EN).

- 13 -
4.TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM HARDWARE B-64663EN/01

Stand-alone type control unit

Slot 2

Data Server board

Hard disk
unit
Mini slot

Analog option board

Tracing sensor

Assist gas pressure analog output

(Note) This servo interface cannot be used by the MT system.

Only the servo interface of the main board can be used.
Serial communication board
Mini slot

Remote buffer board

DNC1 board
DNC2 board
RS-232C I/O device
(when the remote buffer board or DNC2 board is used)

RS-422 I/O device

(when the remote buffer board or DNC1 board is used)
Ethernet
Mini slot

HSSB board
Mini slot

Optical fiber cable

- 14 -
B-64663EN/01 HARDWARE 5.POWER SUPPLY

5 POWER SUPPLY

- 15 -
5.POWER SUPPLY HARDWARE B-64663EN/01

5.1 CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY

Supply power (24 VDC) from an external source to the control unit of
the Series 16i-LB/160i-LB system. Install an external power-on/off
switch for the control unit, as shown in the figure below. When the
Series 160i-LB system with PC functions is used, apply
countermeasures to guard against possible destruction of the data on
the hard disk due to a momentary power failure; for example, install
an uninterruptible power supply. The power rating is equal to the sum
of the capacity of the control unit (total power consumption in the unit
plus a margin of about 20% to 30%) and the output via the control
unit (output from CP1B).

- 16 -
B-64663EN/01 HARDWARE 5.POWER SUPPLY

Sample on/off circuit

The figure below shows a sample on/off circuit. Select the circuit
devices according to the actual power rating. Connect the OFF and
COM lines to the OF11 and OF12 contacts of the laser oscillator,
respectively, so that an interlock can be applied to the power-off
switch.

NOTE
1 For the C series and Y series oscillators, laser
activation can be performed by the above 24 VDC
signal.

5.2 POWER CAPACITY AND HEATING VALUE OF THE

ANALOG INPUT BOARD

The analog input board for tracking control requires an input power
source with a power voltage of 24 VDC ±10% and a power capacity
of 0.3 A. The percentage of ±10% includes instantaneous and ripple
voltages.
The heating value is 7 W.
For the power capacities and heating values of other units, refer to the
"FANUC Series 16i-MODEL B Connection Manual (Hardware)
(B-63523EN)".

- 17 -
6.I/O LIMITATION BASED ON LASER OSCILLATOR CONNECTIONHARDWARE B-64663EN/01

6 I/O LIMITATION BASED ON LASER

OSCILLATOR CONNECTION
In the FS16i-LB system, the laser oscillator is connected in serial via
the I/O unit.
For a laser oscillator interface, three groups with 256 DI and 256 DO
points are reserved.
The machine can therefore use up to 13 groups with 768 DI and 768
DO points (X0 to X95 and Y0 to Y95).
Areas X96 to X127 and Y96 to Y127 cannot be used, even when a
ladder is used to specify writing to these areas.

- 18 -
B-64663EN/01 HARDWARE 7.LASER OSCILLATOR

7 LASER OSCILLATOR

- 19 -
7.LASER OSCILLATOR HARDWARE B-64663EN/01

7.1 CONNECTION OF THE LASER OSCILLATOR

(1) When the version of the laser IF-PCB is earlier than

A16B-2100-0141/07D

(2) When the version of the laser IF-PCB is earlier than

A16B-2100-0141/07D

- 20 -
B-64663EN/01 HARDWARE 7.LASER OSCILLATOR

7.1.1 Connection of the CP1A

CP1A is placed on the adaptor when the version of the laser IF-PCB
(A16B-2100-0141) is earlier than 07D. CP1A is placed on the IF-PCB
when the version of the laser IF-PCB is 07D or later.

- 21 -
7.LASER OSCILLATOR HARDWARE B-64663EN/01

7.2 LASER OSCILLATOR CONNECTION USING AN OPTICAL

FIBER CABLE

When one of the following conditions is satisfied, an optical fiber

cable must be used to connect the laser oscillator to the I/O link:
(1) The length of the required cable is at least 10 m.
(2) A 5.5-mm2 grounding line cannot be used to establish a
connection between the CNC control unit and the cabinet
housing the I/O unit etc., or a connection between the CNC
control unit and the laser oscillator.
(3) The cable may be susceptible to high-level noise.
For example, when the cable is placed near any machine which
produces high-level magnetic noise, such as a welder. Or, when
most of the cable runs parallel to a power line or power
magnetics cable.
(4) The laser oscillator to be connected is certified by the CE
marking system.

Optical I/O link adaptors

To use optical fiber cables for making connections, optical I/O link
adaptors must be used, as shown below.

- 22 -
B-64663EN/01 HARDWARE 7.LASER OSCILLATOR

CAUTION
1 To daisy-chain I/O units to a single I/O link, both
optical fiber cables and electrical cables can be
used.
2 When an optical fiber cable is used, an optical I/O
link adaptor must also be used.
3 Two types of optical I/O link adaptors are
supported: Standard and high-speed.
4 When four or more optical fiber cables are used
(that is, when four or more connections are
established), the cables should be of high-speed
type.
5 Each laser oscillator contains a standard type
adaptor. To establish a connection to the laser
oscillator, therefore, an I/O unit must be provided
with a standard type I/O link adaptor, because only
adaptors of the same type can be connected to
each other.

For an explanation of FANUC I/O link connection using electrical

cables, or the outside dimensions of optical I/O link adaptors, refer to
Chapter 9, "FANUC I/O Link Connection," in the "Series
16i-MODEL B Connection Manual (Hardware) (B-63523EN)."

- 23 -
7.LASER OSCILLATOR HARDWARE B-64663EN/01

7.3 ASSIST GAS PRESSURE ANALOG OUTPUT

Assist gas pressure analog output signals are output from either the
analog spindle interface on the main board or the analog output
interface on the analog option board.
Which interface to use can be specified with the appropriate
parameter.
For details, see Section 4.1 "ASSIST GAS CONTROL" in Part II
"LASER FUNCTION".

To output signals from the main board

CAUTION
1 SVC, ES: Common lines are used for the SVC, ES,
and assist gas pressure analog output signals.
2 The signals in parentheses are high-speed DI input
signals.
3 For details of the output voltage, see Section 4.1
"ASSIST GAS CONTROL" in Part II "LASER
FUNCTION".

- 24 -
B-64663EN/01 HARDWARE 7.LASER OSCILLATOR

To output signals from the analog option board

CAUTION
1 AOUT, 0V: Common lines are used for the AOUT,
0V, and assist gas pressure analog output signals.
2 The signals in parentheses cannot be used.
3 For details of the output voltage, see Section 4.1
"ASSIST GAS CONTROL" in Part II "LASER
FUNCTION".

- 25 -
7.LASER OSCILLATOR HARDWARE B-64663EN/01

7.4 CONNECTION OF THE TRACING SENSOR

CAUTION
1 AIN0, 0V: Common lines are used for the AIN0, 0V,
and analog input signals.
2 The signals in parentheses cannot be used.
2 For details of the input voltage, see the section on
tracing control in the function description.

- 26 -
II. LASER FUNCTION
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 1.FUNCTIONS

1
Overview
FUNCTIONS

For information about connections other than the laser functions, refer
to the "16i/160i-MODEL B Connection Manual (Function)
(B-63523EN-1)”.
Most of the functions described in manual (B-63523EN-1) can be
used with the 16i-LB. Note, however, that some functions cannot be
used with the 16i-LB, while others require a different specification for
use with the 16i-LB.
Whether the functions described in manual (B-63523EN-1) can be
used with the 16i-LB is listed below.
For details of those functions for which a different specification is
necessary, see Chapter 2. The functions are listed below.

Functions
CNCs which can be combined with a oscillator are Series16i-LB and
Series160i-LB.

Legends used in the following table

○ : Standard
● : Standard option
☆ : Option
* : Function included in another option

Axis control
Item Specifications 16i-LB 160i-LB
Maximum total controlled axes
12 axes (macine 8 axes + loader 4 axes) ☆ ☆
(machine controlled axes + loader controlled axes)
Controlled paths 1 path ○ ○
Controlled axes 3 axes ○ ○
Machine
Controlled axes expansion Max. 8 axes ☆ ☆
controlled
Simultaneously controlled axes 3 axes ○ ○
axes
Simultaneously controlled axes expansion Max. 6 axes ☆ ☆
Axis control by PMC Max. simultaneous 4 axes ☆ ☆
Controlled paths 1 path ○ ○
Loader
Controlled axes Max. 4 axes ☆ ☆
controlled
Simultaneously controlled axes Max. 4 axes ☆ ☆
axes
Axis control by PMC Max. 4 axes ☆ ☆
3 basic axes: X, Y, Z;
Axis name ○ ○
Additional axes: U, V, W, A, B, or C
Simple synchronous control 4 pairs ☆ ☆
Twin table control ☆ ☆
Tandem control ☆ ☆
Torque control PMC axis control required * *
Controlled axes detach ☆ ☆

- 29 -
1.FUNCTIONS LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Item Specifications 16i-LB 160i-LB

Least input increment 0.001mm, 0.001deg, 0.0001inch ○ ○
Flexible feed gear Optional DMR ○ ○
Dual position feedback ☆ ☆
Fine acceleration/deceleration ○ ○
HRV control ○ ○
High-speed HRV control ○ ○
Inch/metric conversion ☆ ☆
All axes/each axis/each axial direction/start
Interlock ○ ○
block/cutting block start
Machine lock All axes/each axis ○ ○
Emergency stop ○ ○
Overtravel ○ ○
Stored stroke check 1 ○ ○
Stored stroke limit external setting ☆ ☆
Stored stroke check 2 ☆ ☆
Stored stroke check 3 ☆ ☆
Stroke limit check before move ○ ○
Mirror image Each axis ○ ○
Follow-up ○ ○
Servo-off/mechanical handle ○ ○
Backlash compensation ○ ○
Backlash compensation for each rapid traverse and
○ ○
cutting feed
Stored pitch error compensation ☆ ☆
Inclination compensation ☆ ☆
Straightness compensation ☆ ☆
Position switch ☆ ☆
Unexpected disturbance torque detection function ☆ ☆
Fine torque sensing ☆ ☆
High-speed position switch ☆ ☆
Direction-dependent type high-speed position switch ☆ ☆

Operation
Item Specifications 16i-LB 160i-LB
Automatic operation (memory) ○ ○
DNC operation Reader/puncher interface required * *
MDI operation ○ ○
Scheduling function * *
Program number search ○ ○
Sequence number search ○ ○
Sequence number comparison and stop ☆ ☆
Program restart ☆ ☆
Manual intervention and return ○ ○
Buffer register ○ ○
Dry run ○ ○
Single block ○ ○
Jog feed ○ ○
Manual reference position return ○ ○
Reference position setting without DOG ○ ○
Reference position setting with mechanical stopper ☆ ☆
Reference position shift ☆ ☆

- 30 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 1.FUNCTIONS

Item Specifications 16i-LB 160i-LB

1 unit ☆ ☆
Manual handle feed
2 or 3 units ☆ ☆
Manual handle feed rate ×1, ×10, ×m, ×n * *
Manual handle interruption ☆ ☆
Incremental feed ×1, ×10, ×100, ×1000 ○ ○
Jog and handle simultaneous mode ○ ○

Interpolation
Item Specifications 16i-LB 160i-LB
G00 (linear interpolation type positioning is
Positioning ○ ○
possible)
Single direction positioning G60 ☆ ☆
Exact stop mode G61 ○ ○
Exact stop G09 ○ ○
Linear interpolation ○ ○
Circular interpolation Supported for multiple quadrants ○ ○
Dwell In seconds ○ ○
Polar coordinate interpolation ☆ ☆
Cylindrical interpolation ☆ ☆
(Circular interpolation) + (Linear
Helical interpolation ☆ ☆
interpolation for up to 2 axes)
(Circular interpolation) + (Linear
Helical interpolation B ☆ ☆
interpolation for up to 4 axes)
Hypothetical axis interpolation ☆ ☆
Skip G31 ○ ○
Reference position return G28 ○ ○
Reference position return check G27 ○ ○
2nd reference position return ○ ○
3rd/4th reference position return ☆ ☆
Floating reference position return ☆ ☆
Normal-direction control ☆ ☆
High-speed linear interpolation ☆ ☆

Feed function
Item Specifications 16i-LB 160i-LB
Rapid traverse rate Max. 240 m/min (1µm) ○ ○
Rapid traverse override F0, 25, 50, 100% ○ ○
Feed per minute ○ ○
Tangential speed constant control ○ ○
Cutting feedrate clamp ○ ○
Rapid traverse : linear
Automatic acceleration/deceleration ○ ○
Cutting feed : exponential
Rapid traverse bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration ☆ ☆
Positioning by optimal acceleration ☆ ☆
Linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed
☆ ☆
interpolation
Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting
☆ ☆
feed interpolation
Linear acceleration/deceleration before cutting feed
☆ ☆
interpolation
Feedrate override 0% to 254% ○ ○

- 31 -
1.FUNCTIONS LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Item Specifications 16i-LB 160i-LB

2nd feedrate override 0% to 254% ☆ ☆
One-digit F code feed ☆ ☆
Jog override 0% to 655.34% ○ ○
Override cancel ○ ○
External deceleration ☆ ☆
Feed stop ☆ ☆
Advanced preview control ☆ ☆
AI contour control ☆ ☆
Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration before
☆ ☆
look–ahead interpolation
High-precision contour control A 64-bit RISC engine is used. ☆ ☆

Program input
Item Specifications 16i-LB 160i-LB
Tape code EIA RS244/ISO840 automatic recognition ○ ○
Label skip ○ ○
Parity check Horizontal parity, vertical parity ○ ○
Control in/out ○ ○
1 block ○ ○
Optional block skip
9 blocks ☆ ☆
Maximum value ±8-digit ○ ○
O4-digit ○ ○
Program number
O8-digit ☆ ☆
Sequence number N5-digit ○ ○
Absolute/incremental programming Combined use in the same block ○ ○
Decimal point programming/ pocket calculator type
○ ○
decimal point programming
Input unit 10 time multiply ○ ○
Plane selection G17, G18, G19 ○ ○
Rotary axis designation ○ ○
Rotary axis roll-over ○ ○
Polar coordinate command ☆ ☆
Coordinate system setting ○ ○
Automatic coordinate system setting ○ ○
Workpiece coordinate system G52 to G59 ☆ ☆
Workpiece coordinate system preset ☆ ☆
48 pairs ☆ ☆
Addition of workpiece coordinate system pair
300 pairs ☆ ☆
Manual absolute on/off ○ ○
Optional chamfering/corner R ☆ ☆
Programmable data input G10 ☆ ☆
Subprogram call Four folds nested ○ ○
Custom macro B ☆ ☆
Addition of custom macro common variables #100 to #199, #500 to #999 ☆ ☆
Interruption type custom macro ☆ ☆
Embedded macro ☆ ☆
Circular interpolation by R programming ○ ○
Circular interpolation by 9-digit R designation ☆ ☆
Automatic corner override ☆ ☆
Automatic corner deceleration ☆ ☆
Feedrate clamp based on arc radius ☆ ☆

- 32 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 1.FUNCTIONS

Item Specifications 16i-LB 160i-LB

Scaling ☆ ☆
Coordinate system rotation ☆ ☆
Programmable mirror image ☆ ☆
Figure copy ☆ ☆
Retrace ☆ ☆
Tape format for FANUC Series 15 ☆ ☆
Macro executor Max. 6MB ☆ ☆
C language executor Max. 6MB ☆ ☆

Auxiliary function
Item Specifications 16i-LB 160i-LB
Auxiliary function M with 8 digits ○ ○
2nd auxiliary function B with 8 digits ☆ ☆
Auxiliary function lock ○ ○
High-speed M/T/B interface ○ ○
Multiple command of auxiliary function 3 ○ ○
M code group check ☆ ☆

Tool functions/Tool compensation functions

Item Specifications 16i-LB 160i-LB
Tool function T with 8 digits ○ ○
Tool offset pairs ± with 6 digits, 32 pairs ○ ○
± with 6 digits, 64 pairs ☆ ☆
± with 6 digits, 99 pairs ☆ ☆
± with 6 digits, 200 pairs ☆ ☆
± with 6 digits, 400 pairs ☆ ☆
± with 6 digits, 499 pairs ☆ ☆
± with 6 digits, 999 pairs ☆ ☆
Tool offset memory B Geometry/wear memory ☆ ☆
Distinction between geometry and wear, or
Tool offset memory C between cutter and tool length ☆ ☆
compensation.
Tool length compensation ○ ○
Tool offset ☆ ☆
Cutter compensation C ○ ○

Editing operation
Item Specifications 16i-LB 160i-LB
160m (64Kbyte) ○ ○
320m (128Kbyte) ☆ ☆
640m (256Kbyte) ☆ ☆
Part program storage length
1280m (512Kbyte) ☆ ☆
2560m (1024Kbyte) ☆ ☆
5120m (2056Kbyte) ☆ ☆
125 ○ ○
200 ☆ ☆
Number of registerable programs
400 ☆ ☆
1000 ☆ ☆
Part program editing ○ ○
Program protect ○ ○

- 33 -
1.FUNCTIONS LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Item Specifications 16i-LB 160i-LB

Background editing ☆ ☆
Extended part program editing ☆ ☆
Playback ☆ ☆
Machining time stamp ☆ ☆

Setting and display

Item Specifications 16i-LB 160i-LB
Status display ○ ○
Clock function ○ ○
Current position display ○ ○
Program display 31-character program name ○ ○
Parameter setting and display ○ ○
Self-diagnosis function ○ ○
Alarm display ○ ○
Alarm history display ○ ○
Operator message history display * *
Operation history display ○ ○
Help function ○ ○
FACTOLINK ☆ ☆
Reading information for mounted printed
Remote diagnosis circuit board, CNC data such as * *
parameters, alarm status, etc.
Run hour and parts count display ☆ ☆
Actual cutting feedrate display ○ ○
Directory display of floppy cassette ☆ ☆
Directory display and punch for each group ○ ○
Graphic function ☆ ☆
Dynamic graphic display ☆ ☆
Servo setting screen ○ ○
Servo waveform display Graphic display circuit is required * *
Display of hardware and software configuration ○ ○
Periodic maintenance screen ○ ○
Maintenance information screen ○ ○
Software operator’s panel ☆ ☆
Software operator's panel general purpose switch ☆ ☆
Software operator's panel general purpose switch
☆ ☆
expansion
Touch panel ☆ ☆
External touch panel interface ☆ ☆
English ○ ○
Japanese (Chinese characters) ☆ ☆
German/French ☆ ☆
Multi-language display
Italian ☆ ☆
Spanish ☆ ☆
Korean ☆ ☆
Data protection key Four types ○ ○
Erase CRT screen display ○ ○

- 34 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 1.FUNCTIONS

Data input/output
Item Specifications 16i-LB 160i-LB
Reader/puncher (channel 1) interface ☆ ☆
Reader/puncher interface
Reader/puncher (channel 2) interface ☆ ☆
Input/output simultaneous operation ☆ ☆
Remote buffer ☆ ☆
High-speed remote buffer A ☆ ☆
Data server ☆ ☆
External I/O device control ☆ ☆
DNC1 control ☆ ☆
DCN2 control ☆ ☆
Modem card control ○ ○
External tool offset ☆ ☆
External message ☆ ☆
External machine zero point shift ☆ ☆
External data input Including above three items ☆ ☆
External key input ○ ○
External program input ○ ○
External workpiece number search 9999 ○ ○
External program number search 1 to 9999 * *
Memory card input/output ○ ○
Screen hard copy ○ ○
Power mate CNC manager ☆ ☆

Communication function
Item Specifications 16i-LB 160i-LB
Embedded Ethernet ○ ○
Ethernet ☆ ☆
PROFIBUS-DP ☆ ☆
DeviceNet ☆ ☆
FOCAS1/HSSB PORT2 function ☆ ☆

Laser control function

Item Specifications 16i-LB 160i-LB
Output power command ○ ○
Pulse frequency command 5 to 2000Hz ○ ○
Pulse duty command 0 to 100% ○ ○
Piercing command G24 ○ ○
High-speed piercing command Including the piercing command ○ ○
Assist gas command G32 ○ ○
Power override 0 to 200% ○ ○
Duty override 0 to 150% ○ ○
Frequency override 0 to 200% ○ ○
Assist gas pressure override 0 to 200% ○ ○
Power control ○ ○
Laser screen display ○ ○
Pulse enhanced function ○ ○
Oscillator control using an M code ○ ○
External alteration of piercing time ○ ○
Return light monitoring function ○ ○
Beam output delay function ○ ○

- 35 -
1.FUNCTIONS LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Item Specifications 16i-LB 160i-LB

Purge completed, gas pressure under
Laser status output signal control, base discharging, discharge start ○ ○
ready, etc.
Tracing control G13, G14 ☆ ☆
Tracing interlock function * *
Cutting condition setting function ☆ ☆
Edge machine function ☆ ☆
Start-up function * *
Step control ☆ ☆
Optical path length compensation ☆ ☆
Retry processing function ☆ ☆
High-speed machining function ☆ ☆

Three-dimensional machining tool function

Item Specifications 16i-LB 160i-LB
Attitude control A ☆ ☆
Attitude control B ☆ ☆
Interaction control ☆ ☆
Manual operation in hand coordinate system ☆ ☆
W-axis tracing control ☆ ☆
Spatial circular interpolation G12 ☆ ☆
Three-dimensional coordinate conversion G68､G69 ☆ ☆
Proximity point search ☆ ☆
Spatial corner R insertion G33, G34 ☆ ☆
Three-dimensional conversion function G98, G99 ☆ ☆
Teaching function ☆ ☆
Step feed return ☆ ☆
Bevel cutting compensation function ☆ ☆

Others
Item Specifications 16i-LB 160i-LB
NC ready, servo ready, automatic
Status output signal ○ ○
operation, reset, alarm, etc.
7.2″ monochrome LCD ● ●
9.5″ monochrome LCD ● ●
8.4″ color LCD ● ●
Control unit built-in display
10.4″ color LCD ● ●
12.1″ color LCD ● ●
15.0″ color LCD - ●
Without optional slot (60 mm) ● ●
With 2 optional slots (110 mm) ● ●
Control unit optional slots (depth)
With 3 optional slots (125 mm) ● ●
With 4 optional slots (170 mm) ● ●
Separate MDI (standard vertical type,
● ●
standard horizontal type)
Separate MDI (standard vertical type,
● ●
MDI unit standard horizontal type)
Separate MDI (61–key vertical type, 61–key
● ●
horizontal type)
Separate MDI(PC key, vertical type) ● ●

- 36 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 1.FUNCTIONS

Item Specifications 16i-LB 160i-LB

Touch panel Only for 10.4″ LCD or 12.1″ LCD ● ●
Basic instruction : 0.033 µsec/step
○ ○
PMC-SB7 Max. step number ladder: 64,000
PMC Step sequence function ☆ ☆
system Max. 2MB ☆ ☆
C language
Nonvolatile memory expansion ☆ ☆
I/O Link expansion DI/DO : 1792/1792 points ☆ ☆
Standard operator's panel I/O Unit-MODEL A ☆ ☆
Operator’s panel I/O module ● ●
Connection panel I/O module (DI/DO
Machine interface (I/O Link)
module, 2A output module, Analog input ● ●
Max. DI/DO points: 2048/2048 points
module)
Power magnetics control I/O module ● ●
I/O Unit-MODEL A ● ●
I/O Unit-MODEL B ● ●
Manual pulse generator ☆ ☆
With axis selection and magnification
Pendant type manual pulse generator ☆ ☆
switches
Codeless manual pulse generator Restricted use in Japan ☆ ☆
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series
Connectable servo motor ○ ○
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR β series
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER α series
Connectable servo amplifier ○ ○
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER β series
Pulse coder/optical scale (2-phase pulse
Position detector unit for full-closed control ☆ ☆
interface)
(for full-closed control)
Pulse coder/optical scale (serial interface) ☆ ☆
Linear scale interface with absolute addressing
☆ ☆
reference mark
Control unit supply voltage 24VDC ±10% ● ●
LCD–mounted type control unit,
Ambient temperature around the unit Operating: 0°C to 58°C ● ●
Non–operating: –20°C to 60°C
Normal: 75% or less (no condensation)
Ambient relative humidity Short period (within one month):95% or ○ ○
less (no condensation)
Operating: 0.5G or less
Vibration ○ ○
Non–operating: 1G or less

- 37 -
2.FUNCTIONS DIFFERING FROM THE M SERIES SPECIFICATIONS LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

2 FUNCTIONS DIFFERING FROM THE M

SERIES SPECIFICATIONS
Overview
The specifications of some functions of the 16i-LB differ from those
of the functions explained in "16i-MODEL B Connection Manual:
(Function) (B-63523EN-1)”. This chapter explains these differences.

- 38 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 2.FUNCTIONS DIFFERING FROM THE M SERIES SPECIFICATIONS

2.1 EMERGENCY STOP

Difference
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) is set to 0 while the oscillator
is in the oscillation state (LSTR=1), the beam is turned off, and none
of the assist gas select signals (AG1 to AG3) is selected. Then, the
high frequency power supply is turned off, discharging stops, and the
discharge ready state (LRDY=1) is entered.
In this case, release emergency stop (emergency stop signal *ESP=1),
then set the discharge start signal (HVON) to 0 then to 1. The
reference discharge operation starts, and oscillation is resumed.
To connect the emergency stop signal to the oscillator directly, see the
description of the connection to the laser oscillator.

2.2 FEED HOLD

Difference
When the automatic operation stop signal (*SP) is set to 0 during laser
output, the beam is turned off, the shutter is closed, and none of the
assist gas select signals (AG1 to AG3) is selected.
In this case, setting the automatic operation stop signal (*SP) to 1 does
not cause automatic operation to be resumed. To resume the operation,
set the automatic operation stop signal (*SP) to 1, then set the
automatic operation start signal (ST) to 1, then to 0 again.
If a feed hold is specified in the middle of a block in which the beam
is output, restarting automatic operation places the assist gas select
signals in the state existing immediately before the feed hold state was
entered. The shutter is opened, the beam is turned on, then machine
movement starts.

- 39 -
2.FUNCTIONS DIFFERING FROM THE M SERIES SPECIFICATIONS LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

2.3 TEST OPERATION

2.3.1 Machine Lock

Difference
When beam output is programmed, all commands relating to beam
output are ignored. Instead, only machine move commands are
executed (the beam remains off) and the current position indication is
updated.
When piercing command G24 is executed, no beam is output. In this
case, that block may be skipped with no operation performed. Or, a
dwell may be performed. Either option can be selected with a
parameter.

Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15001 PES
[Data type] Bit
PES Specifies how a piercing command (G24) is to be treated when the
machine lock or dry run is set to ON.
0: Dwell is performed.
1: The block of the piercing command is skipped.

2.3.2 Dry Run

Difference
When beam output is programmed, all commands relating to beam
output are ignored. Instead, only machine move commands are
executed by means of dry run. The beam remains off.
When piercing command G24 is executed, no beam is output. In this
case, that block may be skipped with no operation performed. Or, a
dwell may be performed. Either option can be selected with a
parameter.

Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15001 PES
[Data type] Bit
PES Specifies how a piercing command (G24) is to be treated when the
machine lock or dry run is set to ON.
0: Dwell is performed.
1: The block of the piercing command is skipped.

- 40 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 2.FUNCTIONS DIFFERING FROM THE M SERIES SPECIFICATIONS

2.3.3 Single Block

Difference
When a beam output command block is executed and terminated, feed
stops, the beam is turned off, the shutter is closed, and none of the
assist gas select signals (AG1 to AG3) is selected.
When the automatic operation start signal (ST) is set to 1, then to 0
again, execution of the next block starts.
If this block specifies beam output, the assist gas select signals (AG1
to AG3) are placed in the state existing before the single block stop
occurred. The shutter is opened, the beam is turned on, and machine
movement starts.

- 41 -
2.FUNCTIONS DIFFERING FROM THE M SERIES SPECIFICATIONS LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

2.4 PROGRAM RESTART (LASER SPECIFICATIONS)

Overview
If machining is stopped during automatic operation, machining can be
resumed from a specified block.

Signal
- Program restart signal
REST2<G226#1>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] This signal selects program restart (laser specifications).
[Operation] <1> Select EDIT mode, and display the program. Position the cursor
to the block from which you want to restart the program.
<2> Select memory mode, set the program restart signal (REST2) to 1,
and perform cycle start. Then, search starts, and the automatic
operation started signal (STL) and the proximity point search in
progress signal (LNSR) are set to
<3> During search, M codes and other auxiliary functions are all sent
to the PMC. Every time such a auxiliary function code is sent,
the completion signal (FIN) should be returned.
<4> During search, dwell commands are not executed.
<5> During search, laser output is not performed.
<6> When a block immediately before a specified block is found,
positioning to the end point of that block is performed, after
which the search operation terminates.
<7> Upon the completion of the search, the feed hold state is entered,
and the automatic operation started signal (STL) is set to 0.
<8> Check that the proximity point search in progress signal (LNSR)
is 1, and that the automatic operation started signal (STL) is 0 on
the PMC side. Then, set the program restart signal (REST2) to 0.
<9> Set the automatic operation start signal (ST) to 1 then to 0. Then,
automatic operation restarts from the specified block.

- 42 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 2.FUNCTIONS DIFFERING FROM THE M SERIES SPECIFICATIONS

- Proximity point search in progress signal

LNSR<F225#1>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal posts that the end point of the block immediately before a
specified block is being searched for.
[Output condition] This signal becomes 1 under the following condition:
- When the automatic operation started signal (STL) is set to 1
while the program restart signal (REST2) is 1
This signal becomes 0 under the following condition:
- When positioning to the end point of the block immediately
before the specified block is performed, after which the
automatic operation start signal (ST) is changed from 1 to 0
while the program restart signal (REST2) is 0

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G226 REST2

F225 LNSR

Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15630 NMC NSC PRT NSR PRZ PRS
[Data type] Bit
PRS Selects the following specifications as the program restart function:
0: Standard specifications
1: Laser specifications
PRZ During program restart, the command for performing movement to the
restart position along the Z-axis is:
0: Executed
1: Ignored
NSR During search for a block, the automatic operation signal (OP)
0: Posted
1: Not posted
PRT When an attempt is made to execute the program restart function on a
Z-axis tracing program using G13:
0: Alarm 4001 is raised. (Current specifications)
1: The alarm is not raised. Search is possible. At the restart, turn
on/off the Z-axis machine lock (G108#2, MLK3) at the same
time as the program restart signal REST2. Note that the program
must be specified in absolute mode.
NSC If, with the program restart function conforming to the laser
specifications and the proximity point search function, a program is to
restart in a spatial corner R insertion block:
0: The program restarts at the program-specified point at which a
corner R is not inserted.
1: The program restarts at the end of the inserted corner R.

- 43 -
2.FUNCTIONS DIFFERING FROM THE M SERIES SPECIFICATIONS LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

NMC With the proximity point search of the offset type and the program
restart function, positioning to the restart point is:
0: Executed for all axes at the same time.
1: Executed for the fourth and fifth axes first, then for the remaining
axes. (Note: Executed in non-interpolation mode.)

NOTE
When G13 and G14 are specified, the program
restart function (laser or standard mode) cannot be
used. To enable the use of the program restart
function, specify tracing control by using the
corresponding external signal.

- 44 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 3.LASER SEQUENCE CONTROL

3 LASER SEQUENCE CONTROL

- 45 -
3.LASER SEQUENCE CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

3.1 SEQUENCE CONTROL OF THE C SERIES AND Y SERIES

LASER OSCILLATORS

Overview
The C series (CO2 Laser) and Y series (continuously output type
YAG) laser oscillators are activated and stopped according to the
following sequence chart.

- 46 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 3.LASER SEQUENCE CONTROL

Oscillator start sequence

The sequence of operations from when the power to the oscillator is
turned on to when the oscillator starts oscillation and the response of
the CNC to these actions are described below.
(1) When the power to the oscillator is turned on, the CPU in the
CNC becomes operational and the relevant screen is displayed.
At this point, the CNC is ready for operation. The CNC then sets
purge completion signal PURGE to 1.
(2) When the PURGE signal is set to 1, the CNC receives the signal
for starting oscillator (RUN).
(3) When the CNC receives the RUN signal, it starts controlling the
gas pressure and clears the PURGE signal to 0. Then the CNC
sets oscillator ready signal (WAIT) to 1 and chiller start request
signal CLON to 1.
Then, the CNC sets the chiller start request signal (CLON) to 1
to start the chiller unit. For the Y series oscillator, gas pressure
control is not performed; signal processing is performed
immediately.
(4) When the chiller start request signal (CLON) is set to 1, the
machine tool starts the external chiller to supply cooling water to
the oscillator. While supplying cooling water to the oscillator, the
machine tool sets the chiller ready signal (CLRDY) to 1 and
inputs it to the CNC.
The CNC monitors the chiller ready signal (CLRDY). If the CNC
detects that the signal has been set to 0, the CNC issues an alarm,
assuming that an abnormality has occurred in the chiller.
(5) When control of the gas pressure has terminated, the CNC clears
the oscillator ready signal (WAIT) to 0 and sets discharge start
ready signal LRDY to 1.
(6) When the LRDY signal is set to 1, the CNC receives discharge
start signal (HVON).
(7) When the CNC receives the HVON signal, it turns on the RF
power supply and clears the LRDY signal to 0, in preparation for
reference discharge. Then the CNC sets reference discharge
signal RFHV to 1. The output compensation coefficient is
calculated by measuring the ratio of power drop according to
internal oscillation.
(8) After the output compensation coefficient is calculated, the
reference discharge state is resumed. The oscillator is ready for
machining when the LSTR signal is 1.

- 47 -
3.LASER SEQUENCE CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

The timing chart for operations after the power is turned on is shown
below. In the figure, a solid line indicates the time during which a
signal is on or 1.

Oscillator stop sequence

To turn off the power to the laser oscillator, follow the procedure
below.
(1) When the discharge start signal (HVON) is set to 0 while the
oscillator is in the reference discharge state, the CNC stops
discharge, sets the oscillator signal (LSTR) to 0, and sets the
discharge start ready signal (LRDY) to 1.
(2) When the signal for starting oscillator (RUN) is set to 0 with the
LRDY signal set to 1, the CNC evacuates the fan system by
closing the laser gas supply valve and opening the exhaust valve.
At the same time, the CNC clears the LRDY signal to 0, and sets
the WAIT signal to 1.
(3) On completion of evacuation, the CNC starts purge processing.
For the Y series, since gas control is not performed, evacuation
and purge processing are omitted, and oscillator stop processing
is performed.
(4) When purge processing is completed, the CNC clears the chiller
start request signal CLON to 0, and sets purge completion signal
PURGE to 1.
When the PURGE signal is set 1, the power to the oscillator can
be turned off.

- 48 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 3.LASER SEQUENCE CONTROL

The timing chart for operations before the power is turned off is
shown below.

Signal
- Purge completion signal
PURGE<F221#2>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal notifies the PMC of the time when the oscillator can be
started and when the power to the unit can be turned off.
[Output] The CNC can accept the oscillator start signal (RUN) when the purge
completion signal (PURGE) is 1. When the purge completion signal
(PURGE) is 1, the power to the unit can be turned off.
The purge completion signal becomes 1 under the following
conditions:
- When the power to the unit is turned on, initial clear processing
is completed, after which the CNC becomes ready for operation
- When the oscillator start signal (RUN) is set to 0 during
operation, oscillator stop processing is performed, then purge
processing is completed
The signal becomes 0 under the following condition:
- When the oscillator start signal (RUN) is set to 1

- Oscillator start signal

RUN<G222#6>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] This signal starts or stops the oscillator.
[Operation] Starting the oscillator
When the oscillator start signal (RUN) is set to 1 with the purge
completion signal (PURGE) set to 1, the CNC starts gas pressure
control, sets the purge completion signal (PURGE) to 0, and sets
the oscillator ready signal (WAIT) to 1.

- 49 -
3.LASER SEQUENCE CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Stopping the oscillator

When the oscillator start signal (RUN) is set to 0 during
operation, if discharge is being performed, the CNC stops
discharge. If discharge is not being performed, the CNC
immediately closes the laser gas supply valve, and opens the
exhaust valve to evacuate the fan system for the period specified
in parameter No.15256.
At this time, the discharge start ready signal (LRDY) is set to 0,
and the oscillator ready signal (WAIT) is set to 1.
Upon the completion of evacuation, the CNC starts purge
processing to supply new laser gas, up to atmospheric pressure.
Once purge processing has been completed, the oscillator ready
signal (WAIT) is set to 0, and the purge completion signal
(PURGE) is set to 1.
For the Y series oscillator, the laser gas is not controlled. Hence,
evacuation is not performed.

CAUTION
Safety standards for laser application devices (e.g.,
FDA Part 1040 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
FOR LIGHTEMITTING PRODUCTS, Sec 1040.10
Laser Products, (f), (4) Key control) specify that a
key switch shall be used as the start and stop
switch of an oscillator and that it shall not be
possible to remove the key during operation of the
oscillator.
To maintain compliance with these safety
standards, always use a key switch as the
oscillator start signal (RUN) switch.

- Oscillator ready signal

WAIT<F221#3>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal notifies the PMC that oscillator start processing or stop
processing is being performed.
[Output] The signal becomes 1 under the following conditions:
- When the oscillator start signal (RUN) is set to 1 while the purge
completion signal (PURGE) is set to 1
- When the oscillator start signal (RUN) is set to 0 while the
discharge start ready signal (LRDY) is set to 1
The signal becomes 0 under the following conditions:
- When the CNC is ready for discharge in the oscillator start
sequence
- When purge processing has been completed in the oscillator stop
sequence

- 50 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 3.LASER SEQUENCE CONTROL

- Chiller start request signal

CLON<F221#4>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal notifies the PMC that cooling water must be supplied to
the oscillator.
[Output] Before the oscillator can be operated, cooling water must be supplied
from the external chiller unit. When a supply of cooling water is
needed, the CNC sets the chiller start request signal (CLON) to 1.
When the cooling water becomes unnecessary, the CNC sets the signal
to 0. Therefore, the supply of cooling water to the oscillator should be
started or stopped according to this signal.
The signal becomes 1 under the following condition:
- When the oscillator start signal (RUN) is set to 1 while the purge
completion signal (PURGE) is set to 1
The signal becomes 0 under the following condition:
- When the oscillator start signal (RUN) is set to 0 while the
discharge start ready signal (LRDY) is set to 1, oscillator stop
processing is performed, then purge processing is completed

- Chiller ready signal

CLRDY <G221#6>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] This signal is used to monitor the supply of cooling water to the
oscillator.
[Operation] When the CNC sets the chiller start request signal (CLON) to 1 to
request the supply of cooling water, the machine should supply
cooling water to the oscillator, provided the chiller unit is normal. At
the same time, the machine should set the chiller ready signal
(CLRDY) to 1 and input it to the CNC. When the machine stops
supplying cooling water to the oscillator, the machine should set the
chiller ready signal (CLRDY) to 0.
If the chiller ready signal (CLRDY) is set to 0 while the CNC is
outputting 1 for the chiller start request signal (CLON), the CNC
issues an alarm, assuming that an abnormality has occurred in the
external chiller unit.

- Discharge start ready signal

LRDY<F221#1>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal notifies the PMC that the CNC is ready for discharge for
the oscillator.
[Output condition] When the discharge start ready signal (LRDY) is set to 1, the CNC
can accept the discharge start signal (HVON).
The discharge start ready signal becomes 1 under the following
conditions:
- When the oscillator start signal (RUN) is set to 1, and the CNC is
ready for discharge
- When the discharge start signal (HVON) is set to 0 during oscillation
- When the oscillator start signal (RUN) is set to 0 during oscillation
- When emergency stop is performed during oscillation

- 51 -
3.LASER SEQUENCE CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

The signal becomes 0 under the following conditions:

- When the discharge start signal (HVON) is set to 1 while the
discharge start ready signal (LRDY) is set to 1
- When the oscillator start signal (RUN) is set to 0 while the discharge
start ready signal (LRDY) is set to 1

- Discharge start signal

HVON<G222#7>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] This signal starts discharge for the oscillator, thus readying the
oscillator for operation.
[Operation] When starting the oscillator
When the discharge start signal (HVON) is set to 1 while the
discharge start ready signal (LRDY) is set to 1, the CNC turns on
the laser power supply to achieve the reference discharge state
(simmer discharge for the Y series).
When stopping the oscillator
When the discharge start signal (HVON) is set to 0 while the
oscillator is operating, the CNC turns off the laser power supply
to stop discharge, and sets the discharge start ready signal
(LRDY) to 1.

- Reference discharge signal

RFHV<F221#5>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal notifies the PMC that discharge by the oscillator has been
started to achieve the reference discharge state (simmer discharge state
for the Y series).
[Output condition] The reference discharge signal becomes 1 under the following
condition:
- When the discharge start signal (HVON) is set to 1 while the
discharge start ready signal (LRDY) is set to 1
The reference discharge signal becomes 0 under the following
condition:
- When the RF power supply is turned on, reference discharge start
processing is performed, then calculation of the output compensation
coefficient is completed

- Oscillator signal
LSTR<F221#6>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal notifies the PMC that the oscillator is ready for output.
[Output condition] When the oscillator signal (LSTR) is set to 1, laser output can be
specified for machining.
The LSTR signal becomes "1" under the following condition.
- When the oscillator enters the reference discharge state (for the C
series) or the simmer discharge state (for the Y series)
The LSTR signal becomes "0" under the following conditions.
- When the discharge start signal (HVON) becomes 0.
- When the oscillator start signal (RUN) becomes 0.
- When a laser alarm occurs.
- When an emergency stop occurs.

- 52 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 3.LASER SEQUENCE CONTROL

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G221 CLRDY

G222 HVON RUN

F221 LSTR RFHV CLON WAIT PURGE LRDY

Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15004 CWY
[Data type] Bit
CWY Specifies the type of laser oscillator to be connected.
0: CO2 laser
1: CW-YAG laser

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15003 GVW
[Data type] Bit
GVW 0: Evacuation is not performed before the oscillator stops. (for
maintenance)
1: Evacuation is performed before the oscillator stops. (Normal use)
The duration for which evacuation is to be performed is set in
parameter No.15256.

15256 RUN-OFF evacuation time

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Seconds
[Valid data range] 600 to 32767
[Standard setting value] 900
If bit 2 (GVW) of parameter No.15003 is 1, evacuation is performed
for the set duration when the oscillator start signal (RUN) is set to 0.

Alarm and message

No. Message Contents
4066 DISCHARGING Discharging could not be started normally.
4070 CHILLER NOT READY No ready signal is sent from the external chiller.
4072 CHILL FLOW Cooling water flow is insufficient.
4073 LASER GAS PRES. The laser gas pressure is low.
4075 CHILLER TEMP. Condensation was detected.
4081 GAS PRES. CONTROL The actual gas pressure did not fall within ±2.0 (1 = 133 Pa) of the setting of
parameter No. 15241, within 45 seconds after gas control started.
4099 GAS PRES. NOT With bit 3 of parameter No. 15001 being set to 1, the actual gas pressure was
REACH insufficient when the gas pressure at the start of discharging was raised to the gas
pressure at the time of oscillation. The actual gas pressure was not raised to the
value obtained by subtracting the setting of parameter No. 15248 from the setting of
parameter No. 15242 or No.15243 within 15 seconds after the gas pressure goal
reached the gas pressure at the time of oscillation.

- 53 -
4.ASSIST GAS LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

4 ASSIST GAS

- 54 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 4.ASSIST GAS

4.1 ASSIST GAS CONTROL

Overview
When bit 6 (LHC) of parameter No.15001 is set to 0, assist gas control
described below can be performed. Assist gas control can be specified
in either of the following two ways:
<1> Directly specifying gas pressure control (when bit 0 (AGC) of
parameter No.15004 is set to 1)
- Specifying G32 P_ (T_ R_);
- Specifying G32 L_; with the optional function to set
machining conditions
<2> Specifying a flow pattern (when bit 0 (AGC) of parameter
No.15004 is set to 0)
- Specifying G32 P_ (Q_);
- Performing manual operation

Directly specifying gas pressure control

When bit 0 (AGC) of parameter No.15004 is set to 1, gas pressure
control can be specified directly.
G32, for which a non-zero value has been specified for address P or L,
opens the shutter and outputs an assist gas select signal (AG1, AG2, or
AG3) and assist gas pressure analog signal (see Section 4.2). G32, for
which 0 has been specified for address P or L, closes the shutter,
selects none of the assist gas select signals (AG1, AG2, AG3), and
sets the assist gas pressure analog signal to 0.

(a) Specifying G32 P_ (T_ R_);

Specifying
G32 P_ (T_ R_) ;
Period: Specify the period in which the
specified assist gas pressure must
be achieved.
Gas pressure:
Specify the required assist gas pressure.
The specified pressure is converted and
output as an assist gas pressure analog
voltage. For details of the relationship
between the specified pressure and
output voltage, see the description of the
assist gas pressure analog output.
Gas type: Specify an assist gas type.

When the following sample program is executed, G32 causes the

operation shown in the timing diagram below:
Sample program
G32P1T-R-; Shutter open, Assist gas on command
G01X-Y-F-S-;
G01X-Y-;
G01X-Y-;
G32P0; Shutter close, Assist gas off command
- 55 -
4.ASSIST GAS LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

(b) Specifying assist gas control using the machining condition

setting function

G32L - ;
0: Shutter closed, assist gas stopped
1: Shutter opened, assist gas flow started
according to the machining data
2: Shutter opened, assist gas flow started
according to the piercing data

When the following sample program is executed, G32 causes the

operation shown in the timing diagram below:
Sample program
E101;
E001;
G32L2; Shutter open, Assist gas on command
G24;
G32L1;
G01X-Y-;
G01X-Y-;
G01X-Y-;
G32L0; Shutter close, Assist gas off command

- 56 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 4.ASSIST GAS

Specifying a flow pattern

When bit 0 (AGC) of parameter No.15004 is set to 0, a flow pattern
can be specified.
G32, for which a non-zero value has been specified for address P,
opens the shutter and outputs an assist gas select signal (AG1, AG2, or
AG3) and assist gas pressure analog signal.
G32, for which 0 has been specified for address P, closes the shutter,
selects none of the assist gas select signals (AG1, AG2, AG3), and
sets the assist gas pressure analog signal to 0.

G32P - (Q - );
Pattern: Specify a flow pattern number.
Gas type: Specify an assist gas type.

When the following sample program is executed, G32 causes the

operation shown in the timing diagram below:
Sample program
G32P1Q-; Shutter open, Assist gas on command
G01X-Y-F-S-;
G01X-Y-;
G01X-Y-;
G32P0; Shutter close, Assist gas off command

- 57 -
4.ASSIST GAS LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Switching between direct gas pressure control specification and flow pattern
specification
The G32 command does not necessarily require that T, R, and Q be
specified. If none is specified, however, the system cannot decide
whether gas pressure control is specified directly or a flow pattern is
specified. In this case, the system follows the setting of bit 0 of
parameter No. 15004. This is true for output with the external signal
AGST.

CAUTION
1 The assist gas and the shutter are basically
controlled synchronously. Keep in mind, therefore,
that the shutter is open when the assist gas is
output, and never place your hand under the
nozzle.
2 The assist gas is not output if:
1) A machine lock or dry run is applied.
2) Both a beam lock and shutter lock are applied.
3) No assist gas type is specified.
4) A proximity point search or machining restart is
in progress.
5) The assist gas ready signal is 0.
6) No oscillator is connected.

- 58 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 4.ASSIST GAS

Signal
- Assist gas select signals
AG1,AG2,AG3 <F222#0,#1,#2>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies the PMC of the assist gas type to be selected.
[Output condition] When the specified G32 is executed, the CNC outputs an assist gas
select signal (AG1, AG2, or AG3).
When G32 P_; is specified, the signal corresponding to the number
specified in address P is set to 1. When P2 is specified, for example,
assist gas select signal AG2 is set to 1.
When G32 L_; is specified, the value set in the data area for setting
the machining conditions is read and the corresponding signal is
output as described above.
The PMC should read the assist gas select signal (AG1, AG2, AG3)
and open and close the assist gas valve corresponding to the output
signal.
The assist gas select signals (AG1, AG2, AG3) can be used to output
codes when bit 0 of parameter No.15001 is set accordingly. When
code output is selected, a choice of up to seven gas types becomes
available.

Assist gas selection Signals

number AG3 AG2 AG1
0: Non selection 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
2 0 1 0
3 0 1 1
4 1 0 0
5 1 0 1
6 1 1 0
7 1 1 1

- Assist gas ready signals

AGRDY <G221#7>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Monitors whether the external assist gas control unit operates
normally.
[Operation] After an interval corresponding to the assist gas setting time, starting
from the output of an assist gas select signal (AG1, AG2, or AG3), the
CNC starts monitoring the assist gas ready signal (AGRDY).
The assist gas ready signal (AGRDY) should be set to 1 before the
CNC starts monitoring it. If the signal is not set to 1 before monitoring
starts, the assist gas not ready alarm is issued.
If an error occurs in the assist gas control unit during operation, set the
assist gas ready signal (AGRDY) to 0. This generates an alarm and
stops the operation.

- 59 -
4.ASSIST GAS LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

- Assist gas start signal

AGST <G222#5>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Allows the PMC to start the assist gas.
[Operation] When a flow pattern can be specified (bit 0 (AGC) of parameter
No.15004 is 0), setting the assist gas start signal (AGST) to 1 in
manual operation mode causes assist gas control to be started
according to the data specified in the assist gas select field of the laser
setting screen.
When the assist gas start signal (AGST) is set to 0, none of the assist
gas select signals (AG1, AG2, AG3) is selected.

- Assist gas selection signal

AGSLT <F220#1>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies the PMC that an assist gas select signal is set to a non-zero
value.
[Output condition] When an assist gas select signal (AG1, AG2, AG3) is set to a non-zero
value, the assist gas selection signal (AGSLT) is set to 1. This signal
can be used to determine whether none of the assist gas select signals
is selected by the PMC.

- Machining pressure signal

WKP <F220#5>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies the PMC that the assist gas has reached the specified
machining pressure.
[Output condition] When gas pressure control is specified directly
G32 P_; (or L_;) starts assist gas control. After the set interval
elapses, the machining pressure signal (WKP) is set to 1.
G32 P0; (or L0;) stops assist gas control, returning the machining
pressure signal (WKP) to 0.

- 60 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 4.ASSIST GAS

When a flow pattern is specified

If the gas flow pattern data is set in the gas flow field of the laser
setting screen, assist gas control is performed as described below:
G32 P_ Q_; (non-zero values for P and Q) starts assist gas
control, causing the specified pressure to be output during the
specified period, as the previous step. When the specified period
elapses, the machining pressure is output, rather than the pressure
in the previous step. The machining pressure signal (WKP) is set
to 1.
When G32 P0; is specified, the pressure specified for the
subsequent step is output, instead of the machining pressure, and
the machining pressure signal (WKP) is reset to 0.
Once the period for the subsequent step elapses, the pressure is
reduced to 0.

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G221 AGRDY

G222 AGST

F220 WKP AGSLT

F222 AG3 AG2 AG1

Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15001 LHC EXA
[Data type] Bit
EXA The assist gas select signals offer a choice of:
0: Three types. (normal)
1: Seven types. (code output)

- 61 -
4.ASSIST GAS LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

LHC Oscillator control (shutter open/close, beam on/off, assist gas control)
is:
0: Not performed by external signals. Assist gas control is specified
by G32. (standard setting)
1: Performed by external signals. The PMC performs assist gas
control.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15004 AGC
[Data type] Bit
AGC G32 P_; specifies:
0: A flow pattern.
1: Direct Gas pressure control.

Alarm and message

No. Message Contents
4051 DATA ERROR An illegal value is specified with G32.
The assist gas supply unit does not set
4071 ASSIST GAS NOT READY the assist gas ready signal (G221#7) to
1.
The laser output command is executed
4089 ASSIST GAS NO SELECT while assist gas control is not
performed.

- 62 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 4.ASSIST GAS

4.2 ASSIST GAS PRESSURE ANALOG OUTPUT

Overview
When assist gas control is specified, the CNC outputs the specified
assist gas pressure as an analog voltage signal. As the destination of
the signal, either the analog spindle interface on the main board or the
analog output on the analog option board can be selected.
Which to use can be specified with bit 4 of parameter No. 15011.
For details of how to connect the voltage signal, see the explanation of
the hardware.
The relationship between the specified assist gas pressure and the
voltage level of an analog output signal can be specified in parameter
No.15132.
Upon receiving the assist gas pressure analog output signal from the
CNC, the assist gas control unit should operate the control valve and
automatically adjust the assist gas pressure.
When the control valve operation contains a delay time that cannot be
ignored, the CNC operation can be delayed by adjusting the gas
pressure setting time or pre-flow time.
- When gas pressure control is to be specified directly, adjust the
gas pressure setting time.
- When a flow pattern is specified, adjust the pre-flow time.

- 63 -
4.ASSIST GAS LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15011 AOC
[Data type] Bit
AOC The analog output of the assist gas pressure command is output from:
0: The connector (JA40) on the main board.
1: The connector (JA6) on the analog option board.

15132 Maximum assist gas pressure (AGPST)

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] 0.1kg/cm2 or 0.01MPa
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
[Standard setting value] 99

Specify a gas pressure (kg/cm2 or MPa) that corresponds to 10 V

when converted to assist gas pressure analog output.

Limitations
- If no analog option board is not installed
If no analog option board is installed although the connector (JA6) on
the analog option board is selected, the assist gas pressure command is
not output.

- If using actual-speed analog output B

To use actual-speed analog output B, be sure to set bit 4 of parameter
No. 15011 to 1. Otherwise, neither will be output properly.

- 64 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 4.ASSIST GAS

4.3 ASSIST GAS PRESSURE OVERRIDE

Overview
It is possible to override the assist gas pressure analog output with 0 to
200% of it in units of 1%.

Signal
- Assist gas pressure override signals
*AOV0 to *AOV7<G229#0 to #7>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Overrides the assist gas pressure analog output.
The eight signals represent a binary code. The override value is given
by the expression below:
7
Override value ＝∑ 2 × Vi %
i

i =0
Vi is 0 while *AOVi is 1. Vi is 1 while *AOVi is 0.
[Operation] The assist gas pressure analog output is overridden by 0% to 200% (in
units of 1%).
When a value exceeding 200% is specified, the value is reduced to
100%. When the overridden value exceeds the upper limit for the
analog output voltage, the value is reduced to the upper limit.

Override Override signal

% *AOV7 *AOV6 *AOV5 *AOV4 *AOV3 *AOV2 *AOV1 *AOV0
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
: : : : : : : : :
: : : : : : : : :
100 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
: : : : : : : : :
: : : : : : : : :
200 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G229 *AOV7 *AOV6 *AOV5 *AOV4 *AOV3 *AOV2 *AOV1 *AOV0

- 65 -
5.LASER OUTPUT CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

5 LASER OUTPUT CONTROL

- 66 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 5.LASER OUTPUT CONTROL

5.1 SHUTTER OPENING/CLOSING CONTROL

Overview
The output section of the oscillator contains a shutter that
mechanically shuts off the laser beam output. This shutter is provided
as a safety device. The laser can be output only after the shutter has
been opened.
In automatic operation, the shutter can be opened in either of the
following two ways. A parameter is provided to enable the selection
of the method to be used.
(1) Specifying a G code (when bit 6 (LHC) of parameter No.15001
is set to 0)
In automatic operation mode, G32 P_; or G32 L_; opens and
closes the shutter. When a non-zero value is specified for address
P or L, the shutter opens. When zero is specified for address P or
L, the shutter closes.
In manual mode, the shutter open signal (SHTON) from the PMC
can be used to open and close the shutter.
(2) Specifying an external signal (when bit 6 (LHC) of parameter
No.15001 is set to 1)
When bit 6 (LHC) of parameter No.15001 is set to 1, setting the
shutter open signal (SHTON) to 1 causes the shutter to open in
both automatic and manual operation mode. To close the shutter,
set the signal to 0.
The shutter open signal (SHTON) can be used when the PMC
receives an M code specified in a program. Instead of G32, the M
code can open and close the shutter.

Shutter interlock
A shutter lock signal (*SHTLC) is provided as a safety feature,
making it impossible to open the shutter.
When the shutter lock signal (*SHTLC) is set to 0, the shutter
open/close command cannot be used to open the shutter.
To open or close the shutter with the shutter open/close command,
first set the shutter lock signal (*SHTLC) to 1.

- 67 -
5.LASER OUTPUT CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Signal
- Shutter lock signal
*SHTLC<G222#0>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Interlocks the shutter open/close command so that the shutter will not
open.
[Operation] Set the shutter lock signal (*SHTLC) to 0 to prevent the shutter from
being opened or closed by an invalid shutter open/close command.
To open or close the shutter with the shutter open/close command,
first set the shutter lock signal (*SHTLC) to 1.

- Shutter open signal

SHTON<G222#3>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Opens and closes the shutter.
[Operation] When bit 6 (LHC) of parameter No.15001 is set to 0 and the shutter
lock signal (*SHTLC) is set to 1, setting the shutter open signal
(SHTON) to 1 in manual operation mode opens the shutter.

- Shutter ON/OFF signal

SHTONL,SHTOFL<F220#4,F220#3>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies the PMC whether the oscillator shutter is open or closed.
[Output condition] The SHTONL and SHTOFL signals indicate whether the shutter is open
or closed. The relationship between the shutter statuses and signal
statuses is indicated below. The PMC should judge the shutter status
from both the SHTONL and SHTOFL signals.
The shutter transient state generally lasts for 500 to 600 msec. If the
transient state continues for one second or longer, it indicates that the
shutter has not opened or closed normally.

Signal
State of the shutter
SHTONL SHTOFL
Shutter open 1 0
Shutter closed 0 1
1 1
Shutter transient state
0 0

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G222 SHTON *SHTLC

F220 SHTONL SHTOFL

- 68 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 5.LASER OUTPUT CONTROL

Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15001 LHC
[Data type] Bit
LHC Oscillator control (shutter open/close, beam on/off, assist gas control)
is:
0: Not performed by external signals. The shutter is opened and
closed by G32. (standard setting)
1: Performed by external signals. The shutter is opened and closed
using the shutter open signal (SHTON).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15004 STC
[Data type] Bit
STC Shutter control is performed by:
0: G32. (standard setting)
1: The shutter open signal (SHTON). (G32 is effective only for
assist gas control.)

With the standard setting, G32 can open and close the shutter and can
perform assist gas control. Use this parameter to make G32 valid only
for assist gas control (the shutter is opened and closed by the PMC.)
This parameter differs from bit 6 (LHC) of parameter No.15001.
When LHC is set, the PMC must perform both beam control and assist
gas control.

Alarm and message

No. Message Contents
4065 SHUTTER ACTION The operation of the shutter is abnormal.
4087 SHTTER OH The shutter has overheated.

NOTE
For the C series, the shutter cannot be opened
unless the oscillator is in the LSTR state.
For the Y series, the shutter can be opened even if
the oscillator is in the PURGE state. The oscillator
cannot, however, be started when the shutter is
open. An attempt to do this results in an alarm.

- 69 -
5.LASER OUTPUT CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

5.2 BEAM ON/OFF CONTROL

Overview
When the shutter is open, executing a beam output command causes
the oscillator to radiate the laser beam to the outside.
The beam output command can be issued by either of the following
methods, according to the bit 6 (LHC) of parameter No. 15001.

Using a G code
(1) Using a G code (bit 6 (LHC) of parameter No.15001 is 0)
When the piercing command (G24) or cutting feed command
(G01, G02, G03, G12) is executed, the beam is turned on. When
the command terminates, the beam is turned off. In manual
operation mode, the beam on signal (BEMON) from the PMC
can be used to turn the laser beam on or off.

Using the beam on signal

(2) Using the beam on signal (BEMON) (bit 6 (LHC) of parameter
No.15001 is set to 1)
When bit 6 (LHC) of parameter No.15001 is set to 1, the PMC
can turn the beam on or off in both automatic and manual
operation mode. The beam on signal (BEMON) can be set to 1
when the PMC receives an M code specified in a program. The
M code can turn the beam on or off, instead of the G code. This
method controls the beam through the PMC, causing a delay
relative to beam control with the G code.

Beam lock signal

A beam lock signal (*BEMLC) is supported to ensure safe operation.
This signal can be used to allow specified beam output only when a
key-operated switch is activated.
0: Beam lock status
1: Beam lock released
When the beam lock signal (*BEMLC) is set to 1, the beam lock is
released. When a machining program is executed in this state, the laser
beam is output as specified in the program.

- 70 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 5.LASER OUTPUT CONTROL

To execute a machining program without outputting the laser beam,

set both the beam lock signal (*BEMLC) and shutter lock signal
(*SHTLC) to 0. This setting can also be used to operate the machine
while the oscillator is not connected or not adjusted, or to check a
machining program (movements only).
When the beam on state is selected, the beam output signal (BEAM) is
set to 1. The PMC can check this state.

Signal
- Beam on signal
BEMON<G222#4>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] The beam can be turned on and off by an external signal.
[Operation] When the oscillator is in the oscillation state (oscillation signal LSTR
is set to 1), while when the shutter is opened, the external signal turns
the beam on or off.
(1) When bit 6 (LHC) of parameter No.15001 is set to 0
The beam is output by setting the beam on signal (BEMON) to 1
in manual operation mode.
(2) When bit 6 (LHC) of parameter No.15001 is set to 1
The beam is output by setting the beam on signal (BEMON) to 1
in automatic or manual operation mode.
Instead of the G code, an M code can be used to turn the beam on
or off.
This method controls the beam through the PMC, causing a delay
relative to beam control with the G code.

- Beam lock signal

*BEMLC<G222#1>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] This external signal can interlock the beam on command. The signal
can be used for safety check or for automatic operation in which the
motion of the machine is checked without activating or connecting the
oscillator.
[Operation] When the beam lock signal (*BEMLC) is set to 0, the CNC enters the
beam lock state. In this state, the beam on command (G32 or beam on
signal (BEMON)) cannot be used to output the beam.
To output the beam, set the beam lock signal (*BEMLC) to 1.
0: Beam lock state
1: Beam lock released

- Beam output signal

BEAM<F221#7>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies the PMC that the beam is output.
[Output condition] The signal is set to 1 when:
- The beam is turned on.
The signal is set to 0 when:
- The beam is turned off.

- 71 -
5.LASER OUTPUT CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

- Mode output signal

CW<F222#6>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies the PMC that the beam is output in continuous (CW) mode. In
continuous mode, the pulse duty ratio of the output command, multiplied
by the duty override, is 100%. Power control is not performed.
[Output condition] The signal is set to 1 when:
- The beam is output in continuous (CW) mode.
The signal is set to 0 when:
- The beam is not output.
- The beam is output in pulse mode.

- Mode output signal

PULSE<F222#5>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies the PMC that the beam is output in pulse mode. In pulse
mode, the pulse duty ratio of the output command, multiplied by the
duty override, is less than 100%. Or, power control is used to select
the pulse output state.
[Output condition] The signal is set to 1 when:
- The beam is output in pulse mode.
The signal is set to 0 when:
- The beam is not output.
- The beam is output in continuous (CW) mode.

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G222 BEMON SHTON *BEMLC *SHTLC

F220 SHTONL SHTOFL

F221 BEAM

F222 CW PULSE

Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15001 LHC
[Data type] Bit
LHC Oscillator control (shutter open/close, beam on/off, assist gas control)
is:
0: Not performed by external signals. The beam is turned on and off
by a G code. (standard setting)
1: Performed by external signals. The beam is turned on and off by
the beam on signal (BEMON).

Alarm and message

No. Message Contents
BEAM Beam reflection from the workpiece is greater
4068
REFLECTION than or equal to the specified standard level.

- 72 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 5.LASER OUTPUT CONTROL

No. Message Contents

The actual output is lower than the specified
LASER POWER
4076 average power by a predetermined value or
DOWN
greater.
Assist gas signals were not output.
ASSIST GAS NO
4089 Assist gas signals AG1 to AG3 (F0222#0 to
SELECT
F0222#2)
LASER NOT Before the oscillator is activated, the beam
4090
GENERATE output command is specified.

- 73 -
5.LASER OUTPUT CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

5.3 OUTPUT OVERRIDE

5.3.1 Power Override Signal

Overview
When the C-series or Y-series oscillator is being used, the currently
set output power can be overridden. The override value can be
specified within a range of 0% to 200%, in units of 1%.

Signal
- Power override signals
POV0 to POV7<G223#0 to #7>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Overrides the currently set output power.
[Operation] When the C-series or Y-series oscillator is being used, the currently
set output power can be overridden. The override value can be
specified within a range of 0% to 200%, in units of 1%.
If the overridden power falls outside the range specified for the system,
it is rounded up or down to the upper or lower limit of the range.

Override Signal
% POV7 POV6 POV5 POV4 POV3 POV2 POV6 POV0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
: : : : : : : : :
100 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
: : : : : : : : :
200 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G223 POV7 POV6 POV5 POV4 POV3 POV2 POV1 POV0

NOTE
During high-speed piercing, this function is
disabled.

- 74 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 5.LASER OUTPUT CONTROL

5.3.2 Frequency Override Signal

Overview
The currently set pulse frequency of the laser oscillator can be
overridden.

Signal
- Frequency override signals
*FOV0 to *FOV7<G228#0 to #7>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] It is possible to override the output pulse frequency of the laser
oscillator.
[Operation] When the C-series or Y-series oscillator is used, the frequency
override signals (*FOV0 to *FOV7) can be used to override the
currently set pulse frequency of the laser oscillator.
The override value can be specified within a range of 0% to 200%, in
units of 1%. If the overridden frequency falls outside the range
specified for the system, it is rounded up or down to the upper or
lower limit of the range.
When the specified override value exceeds 200%, it is reduced to
100%.

Override Signal
% *FOV7 *FOV6 *FOV5 *FOV4 *FOV3 *FOV2 *FOV1 *FOV0
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
: : : : : : : : :
100 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
: : : : : : : : :
200 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1

Signal address
(1) For C series and Y series laser oscillator
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G228 *FOV7 *FOV6 *FOV5 *FOV4 *FOV3 *FOV2 *FOV1 *FOV0

NOTE
During high-speed piercing, this function is
disabled.

- 75 -
5.LASER OUTPUT CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

5.3.3 Duty Override

Overview
When the C-series or Y-series oscillator is being used, the currently
set laser output pulse duty can be overridden.

Signal
- Duty override signals
*DU1 to *DU16<G220#0 to #4>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Overrides the currently set pulse duty ratio of the laser oscillator.
[Operation] When the C-series or Y-series oscillator is used, the duty override
signals (*DU1 to *DU16) can be used to override the current pulse
duty ratio of the laser oscillator.
The override value can be specified within a range of 0% to 150%, in
units of 10%. Note that specifying an override value of 0% makes the
duty ratio 0%, resulting in the beam off state.

Override Signal
% *DU16 *DU8 *DU4 *DU2 *DU1
0 1 1 1 1 1
10 1 1 1 1 0
20 1 1 1 0 1
30 1 1 1 0 0
40 1 1 0 1 1
50 1 1 0 1 0
60 1 1 0 0 1
70 1 1 0 0 0
80 1 0 1 1 1
90 1 0 1 1 0
100 1 0 1 0 1
110 1 0 1 0 0
120 1 0 0 1 1
130 1 0 0 1 0
140 1 0 0 0 1
150 1 0 0 0 0

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G220 *DU16 *DU8 *DU4 *DU2 *DU1

NOTE
During high-speed piercing, this function is
disabled.

- 76 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 5.LASER OUTPUT CONTROL

5.4 CHANGING THE PIERCING TIME

Overview
When the C-series or Y-series oscillator is used, external signals can
be used to change the piercing time specified by G24.
When the CNC executes G24, it presets the timer to the specified
piercing time. While the timer is counting down, piercing is executed.

Reducing the piercing time

When the piercing time reduction signal (PTS) is set to 1 during
piercing, the timer set for the piercing time stops counting down at the
rising edge of the signal and piercing stops.

Extending the piercing time

When the piercing time extension signal (PTE) is set to 1 during
piercing, piercing does not stop when down-counting by the timer
ends. The piercing continues until the piercing time extension signal
(PTE) is set to 0.
The following block diagram indicates the piercing operation.

Updating the piercing time

The piercing time can be updated to an extended or reduced value. As
shown in the block diagram, piercing time R, specified by G24 R_; is
stored as active data. When the piercing time is changed by the
piercing time reduction signal (PTS) or piercing time extension signal
(PTE), the update data is prepared by means of time measurement.
When bit 1 (HPT) of parameter No.15003 is set to 0, the update data
replaces the active data.
To execute piercing with the updated time, specify the next G24
command without R. If G24 is specified with R, the updated time is
replaced with the value for R.
If cutting conditions have been specified using the cutting condition
setting function, the piercing time stored in the data area for the
cutting condition setting function is valid at all times and, therefore,
the active data cannot be changed.

- 77 -
5.LASER OUTPUT CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Signal
- Piercing time reduction signal
PTS<G221#2>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] This external signal can abort the piercing specified by G24 and can
reduce the piercing time.
[Operation] When the C-series or Y-series oscillator is used, an external signal can
be used to change the piercing time specified with G24.
When the CNC executes G24, it stores the specified piercing time and
presets the timer to the piercing time. While the timer is counting
down, piercing is executed.
When the piercing time reduction signal (PTS) is set to 1 during
piercing, the timer set for the piercing time stops counting down at the
rising edge of the signal and piercing stops.
The time from when piercing starts until it stops is measured. This
value can replace the piercing time.
Bit 1 (HPT) of parameter No.15003 specifies whether this value is
used to replace the piercing time.

- Piercing time extension signal

PTE<G221#3>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] This external signal can abort the piercing specified by G24 and can
extend the piercing time.
[Operation] When the C-series or Y-series oscillator is used, an external signal can
be used to change the piercing time specified with G24.
When the CNC executes G24, it stores the specified piercing time and
presets the timer to the piercing time. While the timer is counting
down, piercing is executed.
When the piercing time extension signal (PTE) is set to 1 during
piercing, piercing does not stop when counting-down ends. Instead,
piercing continues until the piercing time extension signal (PTE) is set
to 0.
The time from when piercing starts until it ends is measured. This
value can replace the piercing time.
Bit 1 (HPT) of parameter No.15003 specifies whether this value is
used to replace the piercing time.

- 78 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 5.LASER OUTPUT CONTROL

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G221 PTE PTS

Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15003 HPT
[Data type] Bit
HPT When the function for changing the piercing time is executed, the
newly specified piercing time:
0: Replaces the current data.
1: Does not replace the current data.

- 79 -
5.LASER OUTPUT CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

5.5 GUIDE LIGHT ON SIGNAL

Overview
If the laser oscillator contains an optional guide light unit
(semiconductor laser), an external signal can be used to turn the guide
light laser unit on or off.

CAUTION
The external guide light on signal (SCLON) must
be used with a key-operated switch, the key of
which cannot be removed while the guide light is
turned on.

Signal
- Guide light on signal
SCLON<G222#2>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Turns on the laser unit for the laser oscillator guide light.
[Operation] (1) C-series oscillator
If the laser oscillator contains an optional guide light unit
(semiconductor laser), setting the guide light on signal (SCLON)
to 1 turns on the guide light laser unit.
In this state, the oscillator outputs the guide light when the
shutter is closed. When the shutter is open, the oscillator outputs
carbon dioxide gas laser instead of the guide light.
The external guide light on signal (SCLON) must be used with a
key-operated switch, the key of which cannot be removed while
the guide light is turned on.
(2) Y-series oscillator
Each YAG laser oscillator contains a guide light unit
(semiconductor laser). When the guide light on signal (SCLON)
is set to 1, the guide light laser unit is turned on.
When the shutter is opened in this condition, the oscillator
outputs the guide light, either together with or without the YAG
laser. When the shutter is closed, the oscillator outputs neither
the guide light nor the YAG laser.
The external guide light on signal (SCLON) must be used with a
key-operated switch, the key of which cannot be removed while
the guide light is turned on.

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G222 SCLON

- 80 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 5.LASER OUTPUT CONTROL

5.6 STATE OUTPUT SIGNAL

5.6.1 Piercing Signal

Overview
A signal is output to indicate that piercing specified by G24 is in
progress.

Signal
- Piercing signal
PIRC<F222#7>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies the PMC that piercing specified by G24 is in progress.
[Output condition] When the C-series or Y-series oscillator is used, the piercing signal
(PIRC) remains set to 1 while the piercing specified by G24 is being
performed.

CAUTION
1 When beam lock, machine lock, or dry run is
enabled or the pulse duty cycle is set to "0",
executing the G24 command does not set the
piercing signal (PIRC) to "1".
2 If an alarm occurs during execution of G24, the
piercing signal (PIRC) becomes "0".
3 If feeding is placed on hold during execution of
G24, the piercing signal (PIRC) becomes "0".
When feeding is released from hold and the beam
is tuned on, the piercing signal (PIRC) is back to
"1".

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F222 PIRC

- 81 -
5.LASER OUTPUT CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

5.6.2 Laser Processing Signal

Overview
The laser processing signal is output for the time between assist gas
output being started and tracing control being cancelled.

Signal
- Laser processing signal
LPRC<F222#4>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies the PMC of the time between assist gas output being started
and tracing control being cancelled.
[Output condition] When assist gas output is turned on by G32, the CNC sets the laser
processing signal (LPRC) to 1. When tracing is cancelled by G14, the
CNC sets the laser processing signal (LPRC) to 0.

CAUTION
1 If feeding is placed on hold during laser processing,
the laser processing signal (LPRC) remains to be
"1".
2 The laser processing signal (LPRC) remains to be
"1" during single-block operation.
3 If the program is terminated without issuing G14,
the laser processing signal (LPRC) remains to be
"1".
4 A reset turns the laser processing signal (LPRC) to
"0".
5 If the assist gas is not output when G32 is
executed (during machine locked state, dry run, or
simultaneous occurrence of shutter locked and
beam locked states), the laser processing signals
(LPRC) becomes "0".
6 If an alarm occurs, the laser processing signal
(LPRC) becomes "0".

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F222 LPRC

- 82 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 5.LASER OUTPUT CONTROL

5.6.3 Output Drop Alarm Signal

Overview
As the mirror of the resonator becomes dirty, laser output will drop.
When the laser oscillator is activated, the power compensation
coefficient is automatically calculated. By specifying this coefficient
for the values specified for output, the reduction in the laser output
can be compensated for.
When the output drops to such a degree that the compensation exceeds
the maximum permissible value, an output drop alarm is displayed on
the CRT screen. The output drop alarm signal (MWRN) is also set to
1.
Pressing the reset key clears the alarm on the screen but does not clear
the output drop alarm signal (MWRN). The signal returns to 0 only
when the mirror is cleaned, such that the output rises to a satisfactory
level.

Signal
- Output drop alarm signal
MWRN<F220#6>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies the PMC that the reduction in the laser output exceeds the
maximum permissible value.
[Output condition] The signal is set to 1 when:
- The power compensation coefficient calculated upon activation
of the laser oscillator exceeds the maximum permissible value.
The signal is set to 0 when:
- The power compensation coefficient calculated upon activation
of the laser oscillator is within the permissible range.

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F220 MWRN

- 83 -
5.LASER OUTPUT CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

5.6.4 Laser Alarm Signal

Overview
When a laser oscillator error is detected, a laser alarm occurs.

Signal
- Laser alarm signal
LARM<F221#0>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies the PMC that the laser oscillator or laser control has
developed a fault.
[Output condition] The signal is set to 1 when the following occurs:
- No. 4061 Illegal A/D convert-1 - No. 4093 Vibration detected
- No. 4062 Illegal A/D convert-2 - No. 4094 Vacuum pump error
- No. 4063 R/F power supply error - No. 4099 Gas pressure not
reached
- No. 4065 Shutter operation error - No. 4100 Inverter error 1
- No. 4066 Discharge start error - No. 4101 Inverter arrival signal 1
- No. 4067 Laser cabinet temperature - No. 4102 Vibration error 1
error
- No. 4069 Laser IF unconnected/error - No. 4103 Blower not stopped 1
- No. 4070 Chiller not ready - No. 4104 Turbo overcurrent 1
- No. 4072 Chiller water amount error - No. 4105 Turbo temperature error
1
- No. 4073 Laser gas pressure error - No. 4106 Insufficient turbo
lubricant
- No. 4074 Roots flower temperature - No. 4107 Return mirror not
error mounted
- No. 4075 Chiller water temperature - No. 4110 Inverter error 2
error
- No. 4076 Laser power low - No. 4111 Inverter arrival signal 2
- No. 4077 Absorber temperature - No. 4112 Vibration error 2
error
- No. 4078 Laser tube pressure error - No. 4113 Blower not stopped 2
- No. 4079 Press the reset key. - No. 4114 Turbo overcurrent 2
- No. 4080 Laser tube exhaust error - No. 4115 Turbo temp. 2
- No. 4081 Gas pressure control error - No. 4132 A parameter was
changed.
- No. 4082 Negative pressure sensor - No. 4136 Too much internal
error pressure
- No. 4087 Shutter temperature error - No. 4137 Mixer power supply error
- No. 4088 Discharge voltage low - No. 4138 Improper degree of
vacuum
- No. 4091 Inverter error - No. 4139 Mixer pressure switch
error
The signal is set to 0 when:
- None of the alarms listed above occurs.
- The reset key is pressed after the causes of the alarms listed
above have been removed.

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F221 LARM

- 84 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 5.LASER OUTPUT CONTROL

5.6.5 Laser Oscillator Not Connected Signal

Overview
This signal is output if no laser oscillator is connected.

Signal
- Laser oscillator not connected signal
LONC<F223#7>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies the PMC that no laser oscillator is connected to the CNC.
[Output condition] The signal is set to "1" if the power is turned on with no laser
oscillator connected.

CAUTION
This signal is output if the system determines that
no laser oscillator is connected when the power is
turned on. The state of the signal does not,
therefore, change if a laser oscillator is connected
or disconnected after the power is turned on.

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F223 LONC

- 85 -
6.TRACING CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

6 TRACING CONTROL

- 86 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 6.TRACING CONTROL

6.1 TRACING CONTROL

6.1.1 Tracing Function

Overview
When a sensor for detecting the distance to a workpiece is mounted on
the Z-axis, and a signal from this sensor is sent to the CNC, the CNC
outputs a Z-axis (W-axis) move command to establish a specified
distance between the sensor and workpiece.

Commands
Both G codes and an external signal are available as tracing
commands.
The G codes (G13 and G14) and the external signal (TCST) cannot be
used at the same time.

Block diagram of tracing control

A block diagram of the tracing control system is shown below.

Controlled axes
For facing machines
Z axis (The third axis is fixed.)
For three-dimensional machining machines
W and Z axes (The sixth and third axes are fixed. They can be
switched by using the corresponding external signal or G13L_.)

Polarity
Configure the mechanical system so that the nozzle moves away from
the workpiece in response to a positive direction command, and
approaches the workpiece in response to a negative direction
command along the Z-axis and W-axis.

- 87 -
6.TRACING CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Polarity of the sense signal

The sensor should be designed to send a 0-V sense signal when the
nozzle is at the reference distance (L0) position and then output
voltage in proportion to any shift from the reference position. Positive
voltage should be output when the nozzle approaches the workpiece
from the reference distance position.
Negative voltage should be output when the nozzle leaves from the
reference distance position.

Level of the sense signal

As a sense signal, +10 VDC or -10 VDC must be sent to the CNC
when the nozzle has moved away from the reference position by 2 mm
in either the approach or retreat directions.
When the signal output by the sensor is not of the required level, a
gain adjustment circuit must be provided.
Clamp the output of the sensor so that the voltage applied to the CNC
does not exceed ±10 V.

Resolution of the sense signal

When a voltage of ±10V is input for shifts of ±2mm, CNC reads the
shift with a minimum resolution of 0.001 mm with the aid of an A/D
converter.

Selection of the sense signal level

The standard shift is ±2mm, for which as voltage of ±10 is output.
However, for applications where a larger sensing stroke is required,
the parameter No. 15504 is provided:

Shift Sense signal voltage Resolution

±2mm ±10V 0.001mm
±4mm ±10V 0.002mm
±6mm ±10V 0.003mm
±8mm ±10V 0.004mm
±10mm ±10V 0.005mm

- 88 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 6.TRACING CONTROL

Sensor performance
Tracking accuracy depends on the linearity of the sensor. So, use only
a sensor having extremely high linearity.
The frequency characteristics of the amplifier and sensor greatly affect
the response of the tracing control system. So, use only a sensor and
amplifier having extremely good frequency characteristics (with a
frequency band of 30 Hz or wider).
Mount the sensor such that it is mechanically secure, and not subject
to vibration.
Also pay attention to the rigidity, lost motion, and resonance of the
drive system of the tracing axis.

Tracking speed
The tracking speed of tracing is equal to the loop gain multiplied by a
shift.
Vz=60×K× (∆E-E0)
where,
Vz : Tracking speed (mm/min)
K: Tracking speed voltage conversion coefficient
∆E: Amount of shift (mm)
E0: Standard shift (mm)
When the nozzle is lifted away the workpiece, the amount of shift
assumes the maximum negative value, such that the value of Vz
becomes extremely high.
In this case, the nozzle approaches the workpiece at high speed.
Parameter No. 15553 can be used to clamp this speed.

CAUTION
While an axis is assumed a tracing axis, do not
issue move commands using a program or
manually.

Signal
- Tracing start signal
TCST<G225#3>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Tracing is started and stopped using an external signal.
[Operation] Tracing is performed while this signal is 1.
To set this signal to 0 using an M code, set this M code as an M code
without buffering.

- Tracing motion signal

TRCL<F220#2>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal informs the PMC that tracing is in progress.
[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following case:
- When nozzle approach is assumed to have been completed, with
the nozzle having approached to within a certain distance from
the workpiece after the start of tracing

- 89 -
6.TRACING CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

This signal is set to 0 in the following case:

- When a tracing stop condition is accepted
When an M code is used to start and stop tracing, the tracing motion
signal (TRCL) set to 1 must be confirmed after the tracing start signal
(TCST) is set to 1. Then, FIN must be returned.

CAUTION
Set TCST ON when TRCL is equal to 0 and OFF
when TRCL is equal to 1. For example, do not set
TCST to 0 when TRCL is equal to 1 and set TCST
to 1 again before TRCL is set to 0.

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G225 TCST

F220 TRCL

Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15003 TIV
[Data type] Bit
TIV When a tracing shift is read, the polarity is
0: Not modified.
1: Inverted.

CAUTION
The following functions cannot be used with the
tracing axis:
1 Advanced preview feed forward
Set bit 7 of parameter No. 1819 to "1."
2 Fine acceleration/deceleration for cutting and
rapid traverse each
Set bit 0 of parameter No. 2202 to "0."

- 90 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 6.TRACING CONTROL

6.1.2 Tracing Control Adjustment

Overview
After connecting the signal from the sensor to the CNC, make the
adjustments described below.

Sensor adjustment
Position the sensor so that the distance between the sensor and
workpiece is equal to the sensor stroke + α (standard value: 2 mm +
α). (α is between about 0.1 mm and 0.2 mm.)
At this position, adjust the zero point of the sensor amplifier so that
the sensor outputs a sense signal of about 0 V.
Move the sensor toward the workpiece by an amount equal to the
positive stroke (standard value: 2 mm) of the sensor, then adjust the
sensor amplifier so that the sensor outputs a sense signal of +10 V.
Similarly, move the sensor away from the workpiece by an amount
equal to negative stroke (standard value: -2 mm) of the sensor, then
adjust the sensor amplifier so that the sensor outputs a sense signal of
-10 V.

Sensor adjustment on the CNC

Select a sensing stroke by specifying parameter No. 15504. If the
sense signal polarity of the sensor is inverted, set bit 0 (TIV) of
parameter No. 15503 to 1.

Sensing gain setting

Set a sensing gain coefficient with the trace setting screen.
Repeat the following operation a few times to check that there is no
significant setting variation (within about ±20).
Select the trace setting
screen.

Move the nozzle towards the

workpiece using manual operation.

Is the NO
displayed shift starting
change?

YES
Press soft key [START
POINT].

Move the nozzle about 1mm

towards the workpiece using a
jog or handle feed.

Press soft key [END POINT].

Setting is
complete.

- 91 -
6.TRACING CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Zero point adjustment

Set a zero point with the trace setting screen.
Repeat the following operation a few times to check that there is no
significant setting variation (within about ±320).
Select the trace setting
screen.

Move the nozzle towards the

workpiece using manual
operation.

Is the nozzle NO
positioned at the standard
reference position ?

YES

Press soft key [ZERO POINT].

Setting is
complete.

Shift calculation formula

When the above adjustments are made, the CNC calculates the amount
of shift DE by means of the following formula.
∆E= (Ke×E-Ezr)×Emul

where,
∆E: Calculated amount of shift
Ke: Sensing gain coefficient (determined by the above
operation and set in parameter No. 15500)
E: Sense level read from the A/D converter
Ezr: Amount of zero adjustment (determined by the above
operation and set in parameter No. 15502)
Emul:Value set in parameter No. 15504

- Tracing gain adjustment procedure

Tracing gain is a parameter that determines the tracking capability of
tracing. The tracking speed (Vz) of tracing is determined from the
formula below.
Vz=60×K×(∆E-E0)

where,
Vz: Tracking speed (mm/min)
K: Tracking speed voltage conversion coefficient
∆E: Amount of shift (mm)
E0: Standard shift (mm)

- 92 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 6.TRACING CONTROL

The higher the tracing gain, the better the tracking capability.
However, too great a gain results in unstable operation, causing
oscillation within the system. So, a gain that ensures stable operation
must be determined and set.

Gain setting procedure

<1> Set the standard tracing gain.
<2> Move the nozzle away from the workpiece by at least 100 mm.
<3> Start tracing. The nozzle approaches the workpiece, and stops
where the amount of shift is 0.
<4> The nozzle will stop smoothly provided the operation is stable.
The nozzle will vibrate upon stopping if the operation is
unstable.
<5> If the operation is stable, gradually increase the setting to find a
value where oscillation starts when the nozzle stops.
<6> Set the value obtained in the above step, multiplied by 0.8, and
again check that the operation is stable.

Set a tracing gain value in parameter No. 15540 for the Z-axis, in
parameter No. 15541 for the W-axis.

Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15003 TIV
[Data type] Bit
TIV When a tracing shift is read, the polarity is
0: Not modified.
1: Inverted.

15006 TRM
[Data type] Bit
TRM On the trace setting screen, the soft keys are:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.

15500 Sensing gain coefficient (Ke)

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range] 0 to 65535
[Setting] The trace setting screen is used for setting.

15502 Sense zero point (Ezr)

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] mm
[Valid data range] -32768 to 32767
[Setting] The trace setting screen is used for setting.

- 93 -
6.TRACING CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

15503 Filter time constant

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767 (except 1)
[Standard setting value] 0
If tracing becomes unstable as a result of a disturbance such as
mechanical vibration superimposed on the sense signal, set this
parameter to reduce the disturbance.
As a guideline, set a value of no more than 16. If a greater value is set,
the tracing speed response will be lost, thus resulting in problems such
as the nozzle hitting the workpiece upon its approach.

15504 Shift multiplier (EMUL)

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range] 1 to 5
[Standard setting value] 1
A multiplier can be applied to the tracing sense signal.

Set value Max. shift Resolution

1 ±2 mm 0.001 mm
2 ±4 mm 0.002 mm
3 ±6 mm 0.003 mm
4 ±8 mm 0.004 mm
5 ±10mm 0.005 mm

15505 TRA
[Data type] Bit
TRA On the trace setting screen, the current position is displayed:
0: In the relative coordinate system.
1: In the absolute coordinate system.

15540 Voltage conversion coefficient of the Z-axis tracing feedrate control

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
[Setting] Calculate a conversion coefficient using the following formula, and
set the value thus found.
P×4
Conversion coefficient = G × × 2 × 10 -3 × 4096
1000 × Le
where,
G: Tracing gain (sec-1). Standard value = 30 sec-1
Le: Machine travel per motor revolution (mm/rev)
P: Number of detected pulse coder pulses per motor revolution
(p/rev).
Set 2048 when using a serial A or α motor.

The parameters listed below are supported. Usually, set the standard
values.

- 94 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 6.TRACING CONTROL

15510 Integral time constant : standard setting value=300

Integral compensation zero width :

15511 standard setting value=30000 (Not required)

15512 Integral clamp value : standard setting value=0 (Not required)

15520 Phase compensation time constant : standard setting value=0 (Not required)

15521 Phase compensation gain : standard setting value=0 (Not required)

6.1.3 Standard Shift

Standard Shift
A standard shift is used to change the gap between the nozzle and
workpiece. The following formula is used to calculate the feedrate
along a tracing axis.
Vz=K×(∆E-E0) (1)

where,
Vz: Feed rate of tracing axis (mm/sec)
K: Tracking speed voltage conversion coefficient
∆E: Amount of shift (mm)
E0 : Standard shift (mm)

As is obvious from formula (1) above, the amount of shift (DE) that
produces Vz = 0 depends on the standard shift (E0). When the value of
E0 is changed from 0 to 0.5 mm, for example, the positional
relationship between the nozzle and workpiece changes as shown
below.

Standard shift setting range

Controlled by the amount of shift, the standard shift setting range is
restricted to within the range of the sense signal. So, use a standard
shift to enable fine adjustment. The lower and upper limits imposed on
the standard shift values can be specified using parameter Nos. 15531
and 15532.

- 95 -
6.TRACING CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

How to specify the standard shift

The standard shift can be specify as follows:
<1> In program
G13P_ ; Specify the value in address P.
<2> By means of setting data
Changes can be made in the trace setting screen.
<3> By means of the machining condition setting function
Set a desired standard shift value as part of the machining
condition setting data, then start tracing. The standard shift data
is read.
<4> By means of a macro executor
Use system variable #6020.

Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15006 PIN
[Data type] Bit
PIN A standard shift to be specified with address P of G13 must be entered
in:
0: Metric input.
1: Inch input.

15530 Standard shift

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] 0.001mm
[Valid data range] -32768 to 32767
[Standard setting value] 0
The most-recently specified standard shift is written. The standard
shift is rewritten by specifying G13, trace screen setting, or executing
the machining condition setting function.

15531 Setting the lower limit of standard shift

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] 0.001mm
[Valid data range] -32768 to 32767
[Standard setting value] 0
Set a lower limit for the specifiable standard shift values for tracing
control. An alarm is issued if a standard shift value of less than this
lower limit is specified.

15531 Setting the upper limit of standard shift

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] 0.001mm
[Valid data range] -32768 to 32767
[Standard setting value] 1000
Set an upper limit for the specifiable standard shift values for tracing
control. An alarm is issued if a standard shift value of more than this
upper limit is specified.

Alarm and message

No. Message Contents
An out-of-range value was specified in a
4052 G13 DATA ERROR
tracing command.

- 96 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 6.TRACING CONTROL

6.1.4 Approach

Approach
If tracing is started when the nozzle is raised from the workpiece, the
nozzle will start moving towards the workpiece. This operation is
referred to as approach.

Approach speed
The speed of the approach motion is calculated using the folmula
below.
Vz=60×K×(∆E-E0) (1)

where,
Vz: Approach speed (mm/min)
K: Tracking speed voltage conversion coefficient
∆E: Amount of shift (mm)
Eo: Standard shift (mm)

The upper limit of the speed is controlled by parameter No. 15553.

Approach completion
When tracing is started by G13, the approach state is set, and the
nozzle continues its approach until the amount of shift satisfies the
formula shown below.
Upon reaching this point, approach completion is assumed, and
operation proceeds to the next block.
-APRCH≤∆E-E0≤APRCH
where,
∆E: Amount of shift (mm)
E0 : Standard shift (mm)
APRCH: Approach-completion-sensing band width (parameter No.
15550) mm

When the machine does not move to the approach sensing position
because of an excessive load torque in the drive system, set an
approach-completion-sensing bandwidth in parameter No. 15550. If
approach completion is not detected with the standard setting value,
check the load torque in the drive system for abnormalities. When
there are no abnormalities, increase the setting.

When tracing is started, approach completion may be detected even

while the nozzle is lifted away from the workpiece. In such a case,
change the approach completion interval, set with parameter No.
15551. This problem occurs because a transient sense signal variation
caused by a disturbance (such as mechanical vibration) when tracing
is started does not lie within the specified interval.

- 97 -
6.TRACING CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Parameter
15550 Approach-completion-sensing band width (APRCH)
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] 0.001mm
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
[Standard setting value] 50
Set the amount of shift used to assume approach completion.
Approach completion is assumed when the state where the amount of
shift is within a specified approach-completion-sensing bandwidth has
existed for the approach completion interval, set in parameter No.
15551, or longer.

15551 Approach completion interval time

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
[Standard setting value] 500
Upon detecting the state where the tracing shift is within the
approach-completion-sensing bandwidth, the timer is started. The
amount of shift is checked when the timer times out. If this check
finds that the amount of shift is within the
approach-completion-sensing bandwidth, approach completion is
assumed.

15553 Approach side feedrate upper limit

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] mm/min
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
[Standard setting value] 1200
Set an upper limit for the approach speed. A calculated approach
speed is clamped to this upper limit.

15554 Constant for approach side feedrate clamping

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] mm/min
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Calculate the constant used for approach side feedrate clamping using
the formula below, then set the found value.
4×P
Constant for approach side feedrate clamping＝
Le
where,
P: Number of detected pulse coder pulses per motor revolution
(p/rev) (Set 2048 when using a serial A or motor.)
Le: Machine travel per motor revolution (mm/rev)

- 98 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 6.TRACING CONTROL

6.1.5 Tracing Alarm

Overview
Two check functions are provided for tracing.

Over-shift alarm
If, during approach, the nozzle comes too close to the workpiece, the
nozzle is stopped by means of the over-shift alarm, and the alarm
signal (TRALM) is sent to the PMC.
The level at which the over-shift alarm is issued can be set in
parameter No. 15533. Set a value within the range of the sensor, and
consider the overrun that occurs when the nozzle is stopped in the
event of an alarm.
Reset this alarm, if issued, by moving the nozzle away from the
workpiece in the +Z (+W) direction by jog feed or handle feed, then
pressing the reset button.

Tracing range-over alarm

If the absolute value of a shift exceeds a specified value, the status is
reported to the PMC.

<1> When the trace check mode signal TRCKM=0

When |∆E| ≥ EOVRS is sensed, the system stops with an alarm and
the signal TRALM becomes 1.
The value for EOVRS is set in parameter No. 15534.
<2> When trace check mode signal TRCKM=1
When |∆E| ≥ EOVRS is sensed, the system continues operation
without issuing an alarm, and signal TRERS become and is
maintained at 1 until the amount of shift becomes smaller than
EOVRS.

Signal
- Alarm signal
TRALM<F220#7>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal reports the detection of a tracing over-shift alarm or
tracing range-over alarm to the PMC.
[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following cases:
- When a tracing over-shift alarm is detected
- When a tracing over-range alarm is detected while trace check
mode is off
This signal is set to 0 in the following case:
- When an alarm is reset by pressing the reset button

- 99 -
6.TRACING CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

- Trace check mode signal

TRCKM<G225#2>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] This signal detects whether the tracing shift exceeds a specified
tracing range-over alarm value.
[Operation] (1) When the trace check mode signal (TRCKM) is set to 0
When the tracing shift exceeds a tracing range-over alarm value
(set in parameter No. 15537), tracing is stopped, and the alarm
signal (TRALM) is set to 1.
(2) When the trace check mode signal (TRCKM) is set to 1
While the tracing shift exceeds the tracing range-over alarm
value (set in parameter No. 15537), the tracing disabled state
signal (TRERS) is set to 1.

- Tracing disabled state signal

TRERS<F220#0>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal informs the PMC that the tracing shift exceeds the
specified tracing range-over alarm value.
[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following case:
- When the trace check mode signal is set to 1, and the tracing shift
exceeds the tracing range-over alarm value (set in parameter No.
15537)
This signal is set to 0 in the following cases:
- When the trace check mode signal is set to 0
- When the trace check mode signal is set to 1, and the tracing shift
is within the tracing range-over alarm value (set in parameter No.
15537)

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G225 TRCKM

F220 TRALM TRERS

Parameter
15533 Tracing over-shift alarm
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] 0.001mm
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
[Standard setting value] 1200
If the tracing shift exceeds the tracing over-shift alarm value, set in
this parameter, an alarm is issued and operation is stopped, with the
occurrence of an abnormal approach assumed.

- 100 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 6.TRACING CONTROL

15537 Tracing range-over alarm (EOVRS)

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] 0.001mm
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
[Standard setting value] 1000
When the absolute value of a tracing shift exceeds the value set in this
parameter, an alarm, or a signal indicating that the value set in this
parameter has been exceeded, is output.

15538 Tracing range-over alarm mask

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
[Standard setting value] 1000
When the standard shift is rewritten during tracing, the tracing
range-over alarm is detected in the transient state. In this case, tracing
range-over alarm detection is masked for the period set in this
parameter.

15539 Tracing range-over alarm offset (EOVRD)

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] 0.001mm
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
[Standard setting value] 0
An offset for the value set in parameter No. 15537 can be added to an
approach
side sense value. As a result, the sensing range is:
-EOVRS ≥ ∆E, ∆E ≥ EOVRS + EOVRD

- 101 -
6.TRACING CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

6.1.6 Tracing Gain Override

Overview
Tracing gain can be overridden in steps of 12.5%.

Signal
- Tracing gain override
GAPG0 to GAPG2<G225#4 to #6>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Tracing gain can be overridden using these signals.
[Operation] Tracing gain can be overridden in steps of 12.5%.

Override
GAPG2 GAPG1 GAPG0
%
100 0 0 0
87.5 0 0 1
75 0 1 0
62.5 0 1 1
50 1 0 0
37.5 1 0 1
25 1 1 0
12.5 1 1 1

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G225 GAPG2 GAPG1 GAPG0

- 102 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 6.TRACING CONTROL

6.2 TRACING INTERLOCK FUNCTION

Overview
Once this external signal has been turned on during tracing control,
interlock is applied to tracing control while the signal is on, thus
stopping tracing control. While tracing control is enabled, the nozzle
may be moved through space where no workpiece exists during
machining. This signal can be used to, for example, continue
machining without lowering the nozzle by externally stopping tracing
control along the Z-axis.

Operation during tracing control

During tracing control, setting tracing interlock signal (*TRIL) to 0
stops tracing control. While the *TRIL signal is set to 0, machining
along the X-axis and Y-axis continues without tracing control.
Subsequently setting the *TRIL signal to 1 causes tracing control
along the Z-axis to be restarted. When the *TRIL signal is set to 0,
position control is applied to the Z-axis but automatic operation
commands can not be specified for the Z-axis. Manual operation is,
however, possible by halting automatic operation.

Operation prior to execution of tracing command (G13)

If the *TRIL signal has already been set to 0 before the G13 command
is executed, the program proceeds by ignoring G13. Subsequently
setting the *TRIL signal to 1 causes tracing control to be started and
program execution to be resumed.

Operation during execution of tracing command (G13)

If the *TRIL signal is set to 0 during approach with tracing control
applied according to the G13 command, tracing control is stopped,
then program execution advances to next block. Subsequently setting
the *TRIL signal to 1 causes approach to be restarted and program
execution to be resumed.

Operation after execution of tracing stop command (G14)

The *TRIL signal has no effect once tracing control has stopped after
execution of the G14 command. In this state, tracing control mode is
canceled regardless of the state of the *TRIL signal.

- 103 -
6.TRACING CONTROL LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Reset processing
When interlock is applied to tracing control with the *TRIL signal set
to 0, a reset operation cancels tracing control mode as well as
interlock.

Signal
- Tracing interlock signal
*TRIL<G227#6>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] By means of the external signal, Z-axis tracing can be stopped and
clamped.
[Operation] When the tracing interlock signal *TRIL is set to 0 during tracing
control, tracing is interlocked and stopped while the signal is set to 0.
When tracing control is enabled, and the nozzle is to move through a
region where no workpiece is located, for example, this function can
be used to enable machining to continue by temporarily stopping
Z-axis tracing externally without lowering the nozzle.

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G227 *TRIL

Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15005 ITR
[Data type] Bit
ITR The tracing interlock function is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

- 104 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 6.TRACING CONTROL

6.3 TRACING AXIS MACHINE LOCK

Overview
In tracing mode, the tracing axis can be stopped by changing its speed
to 0. This does not cause the system to leave tracing mode. The axis
can therefore be stopped before tracing mode is canceled.

Signal
- Tracing axis machine lock signal
TRMLK<G227#7>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Changes the tracing axis speed to 0, so that the system enters the
machine lock state.

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G227 TRMLK

NOTE
1 Turning the tracing axis machine lock signal on or
off in tracing mode
In tracing mode, as soon as the tracing axis
machine lock signal is set to 1, a tracing axis
machine lock is applied. As a result, the tracing
speed is changed to 0, causing the axis to stop.
Note that acceleration/deceleration is not
performed. Thus, do not set the tracing axis
machine lock signal to 1 when tracing occurs at
high speed (immediately after an approach is
started, for example).
Also in the tracing axis machine lock state, care
should be taken when setting the tracing axis
machine lock signal to 0; for example, do not set
the signal to 0 when the tracing axis is away from a
workpiece.
2 When G13 is specified in the tracing axis machine
lock state, the approach is not completed with the
block containing G13, and the next block is
executed. Then, the tracing mode signal is set to 1.

- 105 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

7 THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING
SYSTEM

- 106 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

7.1 ATTITUDE CONTROL

Overview
Specifying five or more control axes as well as attitude control allows
attitude control of a nozzle with the fourth and fifth axes as rotation
axes, enabling a three-dimensional machine to be configured.
Two types of attitude control are provided according to the shape of
the nozzle head.
<1> Attitude control A (zero-offset head)
<2> Attitude control B (offset head)

CAUTION
The following restrictions are imposed if the attitude
control function is attached. The meanings of the
terms used in the explanation are as follows:
1) The term three-dimensional machine refers to
machines performing attitude control.
2) The term three-dimensional machining refers
to machining by specifying linear axes plus
rotation axes.
3) The term two-dimensional machining refers to
machining by specifying linear axes.

1 The following functions cannot be used in three-dimensional

machining. Use them in two-dimensional machining programs.
- Advanced preview control
- AI contour control
- Laser power control
- Step control
- Edge machine function
- Start-up machining function
- Retry processing function7
2 The following functions cannot be used with three-dimensional
machines:
- High-precision contour control and its related functions
- High-speed laser machining

- 107 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

7.1.1 Attitude Control A (Zero-offset Head)

Overview
The nozzle-head position fixing (zero-offset) mechanism consists of
the α (4th) axis, that rotates around the Z-axis, and the β (5th) rotation
axis, that is associated with the α axis. By means of this structure, the
nozzle head is positioned to the point where the center lines of α-axis
rotation and β-axis rotation intersect.

- 108 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

Reference positions
The reference positions of the α and β axes are indicated by their
zero-degree positions and rotation directions shown in the above
figure.

Reference position of the α axis

When the α axis is viewed from the +Z direction, the position where
the arm faces in the +Y direction is 0°. When +90° rotation from that
position is commanded, the α axis rotates counterclockwise and
matches the -X direction.

Reference position of the β axis

When the α axis is set to 0° and the β axis is viewed from the +X
direction, the position where the nozzle faces in the -Z direction is 0°.
When +90° rotation from that position is commanded, the β axis
rotates counterclockwise.

Setting differences if the α and β axes are not in their reference positions
If the axes are not in their reference positions, specify the differences
in the appropriate parameters.
By specifying them in the parameters, the CNC performs attitude
control by considering the differences from the reference positions.
The rotation directions can be selected with parameter No. 15601.
The machine zero-degree positions can be offset with parameters Nos.
15601 and 15611.

Axis names
Specify the names of the α (4th) and β (5th) axes using parameter No.
1020.

Setting the maximum speed for the α and β axes

When a command causes the nozzle to perform a large rotational
movement about the α or β axis, while movement along the X-, Y-
and Z-axes is small, the rotation speed may exceed the limit. In such a
case, when the maximum speed for the α and β axes is set in
parameters No. 15612 and 15613, the nozzle is moved along the X-,
Y-, and Z- axes at a lower speed that is calculated according to the set
maximum speed (automatic deceleration).

Interaction control
The following figure shows the configuration of axes for the nozzle
head.
As shown in the figure, interaction control is as follows. The motor for
the β axis is located around the Z axis, and gears transmit rotational
power to the nozzle under the attitude control of the nozzle. In this
case, when a command specifying the α axis is issued, the housing
rotates, and the nozzle rotates on the Z axis. At the same time, gear B
must rotate on gear A. This movement means that the nozzle is rotated
by the β axis.

- 109 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Namely, the α axis is rotated by the command specifying the α axis at

the same time the β axis is rotated.
The interaction control function automatically issues the same
command as the command specifying the α axis for the β axis to
cancel the rotation of the β axis in the nozzle head whose axes are
configured so that the β axis is rotated by the command specifying the
α axis. Polarity is selected by the parameter No. 15602:

W-axis tracing control

The W axis can be added to the 6th axis as a tracing axis.

Parameter

1020 Axis names used in the program

[Data type] Byte axis
Select the names of the 4th and 5th axes from A, B, C, U, and V, and
set the relevant values. When W-axis tracing is selected, select W as
the name of the 6th axis.

Axis name Setting value Axis name Setting value

A 65 U 85
B 66 V 86
C 67 W 87

- 110 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15601 PA5 PA4
[Data type] Bit
PA4 The α axis rotates:
0: In the same direction as that defined for the reference position.
1: In the opposite direction to that defined for the reference
position.
PA5 The β axis rotates:
0: In the same direction as that defined for the reference position.
1: In the opposite direction to that defined for the reference
position.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15602 TGC
[Data type] Bit
TGC For interaction control, the rotation of the α axis is specified in a
command:
0: Using a sign different from that used for the β axis rotation
command.
1: Using the same sign as that used for the β axis rotation
command.

15610 Mechanical zero-degree position offset of the α axis

15611 Mechanical zero-degree position offset of the β axis

[Data type] 2-word
[Unit of data] 0.001deg
[Valid data range] 0, 90000, 180000, 270000
[Standard setting value] 0
Set the mechanical zero-degree position offset for the α and β axes.

15612 Maximum speed for machining feed about the α axis

15613 Maximum speed for machining feed about the β axis

[Data type] 2-word
[Unit of data] deg/min
[Valid data range] 6 to 15000
Set the maximum speed for machining feed about the α and β axes.
When attitude control is performed in synchronization with the move
command along the X-, Y-, and Z-axes, the nozzle is moved along the
X-, Y-, and Z- axes at a lower speed corresponding to that when the
rotation speed about the α or β axis is clamped to the maximum speed.
When interaction control is specified, the same value must be set for
the α and β axes.

- 111 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

7.1.2 Attitude Control B (Offset Nozzle)

Overview
The offset mechanism consists of the α (4th) axis that rotates on the Z
axis and the β (5th) rotation axis associated with the α axis. In this
structure, the nozzle head is positioned at the point of intersection of
the center lines of α-axis rotation and β-axis rotation, and the center
lines of α-axis rotation and the nozzle do not intersect.

Reference positions
The reference attitudes of the α and β axes are indicated by their
zero-degree positions and rotation directions shown in the above
figure.

Reference position of the α axis

When the α axis is viewed from the +Z direction, the position where
the arm faces in the +Y direction is 0°. When +90° rotation from that
position is commanded, the α axis rotates counterclockwise and
matches the -X direction.

- 112 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

Reference attitude of the β axis

When the α axis is set to 0° and the β axis is viewed from the +X
direction, the position where the nozzle faces in the -Z direction is 0°.
When +90° rotation from that position is commanded, the β axis
rotates counterclockwise.

Setting differences if the α and β axes are not in their reference positions
If the axes are not in their reference positions, specify the differences
in the appropriate parameters.
By specifying them in the parameters, the CNC performs attitude
control by considering the differences from the reference positions.
The rotation directions can be selected with parameter No. 15601.
The machine zero-degree positions can be offset with parameters Nos.
15601 and 15611.

Coordinate system
The machine coordinates refer to the coordinates (x, y, z) of the fixed
section of the nozzle.
The program coordinates refer to the coordinates (X, Y, Z) of the
nozzle head.
The length of the 1st arm, L1, and the length of the 2nd arm, required
to convert the machine coordinates to program coordinates. Specify
them using the parameters No. 15615 and 15616.

Axis names
Specify the names of the α (4th) and β (5th) axes using parameter No.
1020.

Attitude control mode

In manual operation, mode select signal ALNAXS can be used to
switch between the nozzle head fixing mode and the independent axis
mode. When the ALNAXS signal is set to 0, the machine tool enters
the nozzle head fixing mode. When the ALNAXS signal is set to 1,
the machine tool enters the independent axis mode.
In automatic operation, the machine tool automatically enters the
nozzle head fixing mode regardless of the mode select signal.
In manual reference position return, the machine tool automatically
enters the independent axis mode regardless of the mode select signal.
After reference position return is completed, the attitude control
function is enabled.
In automatic reference position return, the machine tool automatically
operates in the independent axis mode.

Independent axis mode

When the command specifying the α or β axis is issued, only the
specified axis rotates. When the α or β axis is rotated by this
command, the position of the nozzle head is changed. The coordinates
in the incremental coordinate system and workpiece coordinate system
are then changed according to changed coordinates (X, Y, Z) to make
the position of the nozzle head match the coordinate systems.

- 113 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Nozzle head fixing mode

When the command specifying the α or β axis is issued, the specified
axis is rotated at the same time linear axes X, Y, and Z are moved.
This allows the specified axis to rotate around the nozzle head
position.
When the α or β axis is rotated by the command, the position of the
nozzle head is changed. The X, Y, and X axes are then moved
according to changed coordinates (X, Y, Z) to return the nozzle head
to the original position.
This operation does not affect the incremental coordinate system and
workpiece coordinate system of the X, Y, and Z axes, but affects their
machine coordinate system.

Setting the maximum speed for the α and β axes

When a command causes the nozzle to perform a large rotational
movement about the α or β axis, while movement along the X-, Y-
and Z-axes is small, the rotation speed may exceed the limit. In such a
case, when the maximum speed for the α and β axes is set in
parameters Nos. 15612 and 15613, the nozzle is moved along the X-,
Y-, and Z- axes at a lower speed that is calculated according to the set
maximum speed (automatic deceleration).

Feedrate clamp function

If the fourth and fifth axes are specified together with the X, Y, and Z
axes, the speeds on the X, Y, and Z axes that have been compensated
for by attitude control B may be very high. This function is intended
to clamp the specified feedrate so that the speeds on the X, Y, and Z
axes that have been compensated for do not exceed the rapid traverse
rate (parameter No. 1420). This function is effective to the G01, G02,
G03, and G12 commands, as well as the interpolation-type G00
command.
The clamp speed in the "G91 G01 Xx Yy Zz Aa Bb Ff" block is
determined as described below.

- 114 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

In the following description, the axis names A and B represent the

fourth and fifth axes, respectively.
The maximum feedrate on the X axis that has been compensated for
by attitude control B can be estimated with the following formula:
Fxmax = [f×x/L]+[f×a/L×(π×R/180)]+[f×b/L×(π×P/180)]
L= (x2+y2+z2) : Travel distance of the nozzle head
R= [(Length of the first arm)2+(Length of the second arm)2]
P : Length of the second arm
F×x/L : Speed on the X axis that is generated with
the Xx command
F×a/L×(π×R/180) : Maximum speed on the X axis that is
generated by Aa command compensation
F×b/L×(π×P/180) : Maximum speed on the X axis that is
generated by Bb command compensation
The value of "f" that does not cause Fxmax to exceed the rapid
traverse rate on the X axis (parameter No. 1420) is calculated.
fx = Rpdx / { [x/L] + [a/L×(π×R/180)] + [b/L×(π×P/180)] }
fx : "f" determined from the X axis
Rpdx : Rapid traverse rate on the X axis (parameter No. 1420)
Similarly, the clamp speed is determined from the maximum
feedrate on the Y axis.
Fymax = [f×y/L] + [f×a/L×(π×R/180)] + [f×b/L×(π×P/180)]
fy = Rpdy / { [y/L] + [a/L×(π×R/180)] + [b/L×(π×P/180)] }
fy : "f" determined from the Y axis
Rpdy : Rapid traverse rate on the Y axis (parameter No. 1420)
For the Z axis, no compensation with the Aa command will be
performed. Thus,
Fzmax = [f×z/L] + [f×b/L×(π×P/180)]
fz = Rpdz / { [z/L] + [b/L×(π×P/180)] }
fz : "f" determined from the Z axis
Rpdz : Rapid traverse rate on the Z axis (parameter No. 1420)
The smallest value of the determined "fx," "fy," and "fz" will be
assumed the cutting feedrate clamp value.

Remark)
In reality, [f×a/L×(π×R/180)] and [f×b/L×(π×P/180)] are not
generated at the same time. For this reason, the speed on each
axis after clamping will be slightly lower than the rapid traverse
rate.

In "G91 G02 Xx Yy Zz Aa Bb Ff," the maximum speeds on the X, Y,

and Z axes are estimated as described below.
Fxmax = f + [f×a/L×(π×R/180)] + [f×b/L×(π×P/180)]
Fymax = f + [f×a/L×(π×R/180)] + [f×b/L×(π×P/180)]
Fzmax = [f×y/L] + [f×b/L*(π*P/180)]
Thus, the speed clamp value is determined with the following
formulas:
fx = Rpdx / { 1 + [a/L×(π×R/180)] + [b/L×(π×P/180)] }
fy = Rpdy / { 1 + [a/L×(π×R/180)] + [b/L×(π×P/180)] }
fz = Rpdz / { [z/L] + [b/L×(π×P/180)] }

- 115 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Sample
Assume the following:
Length of the first arm: 130mm
Length of the second arm: 145mm
Rapid traverse rates on the respective axes: 24000 for X, 24000 for Y,
20000 for Z, 4000 for A, and 8000 for B
Upper speed limits during machining feed along the A and B axes:
4000 for A and 8000 for B
The clamp speed in the next command block is calculated.
G91 G01 X10. Y20. Z30. A45. B90. F5000;
The travel distance of the nozzle head is L= (102+202+302) =37.416
Assuming the nozzle head speed after clamping to be f,
The speed for the X axis command is FXL = f × 10 / L = 0.267 × f
The speed for the Y axis command is FYL = f × 20 / L = 0.535 × f
The speed for the Z axis command is FZL = f × 30 / L = 0.802 × f
The speed on the A axis is FAL = f × 45 / L = 1.203 × f
The speed on the B axis is FBL = f × 90 / L = 2.405 × f
Assuming that operation is performed on the A axis when the position
on the B axis is at 90°,
The maximum speed on the X axis by A axis attitude control is
FXA = FAL × π × (1302+1452) / 180 = 4.089 × f
The maximum speed on the Y axis by A axis attitude control is
FYA = FAL × π × (1302+1452) / 180 = 4.089 × f
The maximum speed on the Z axis by A axis attitude control is
FZA = 0
Assuming that operation is performed on the B axis when the position
on the A axis is at 0°,
The maximum speed on the X axis by B axis attitude control is
FXB = FBL × π × 145 / 180 = 6.086 × f
Assuming that operation is performed on the B axis when the position
on the A axis is at 90°,
The maximum speed on the Y axis by B axis attitude control is
FYB = FBL × π × 145 / 180 = 6.086 × f
The maximum speed on the Z axis by B axis attitude control is
FXB = FBL × π × 145 / 180 = 6.086 × f
Totaling the speeds for the X, Y, and Z axis commands and the speeds
on the X, Y, and Z axes by A and B axis attitude control,
The estimated maximum speed on the X axis is
FXMAX = FXL + FXA + FXB = 10.442 × f
The estimated maximum speed on the Y axis is
FYMAX = FYL + FYA + FYB = 10.71 × f
The estimated maximum speed on the Z axis is
FZMAX = FZL + 0 + FZB = 6.888 × f
Let us find the value of f that does not cause FXMAX, FYMAX, and FZMAX
to exceed the rapid traverse rates on the X, Y, and Z axes,
FXMAX = 10.442 × f ≤ 24000, thus f = 2298
FYMAX = 10.71 × f ≤ 24000, thus f = 2241
FZMAX = 6.888 × f ≤ 20000, thus f = 2904
The nozzle head speed that does not cause the rapid traverse rates on
the X, Y, and Z axes to be exceeded is 2241 mm/min.
- 116 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

Automatic feedrate override function

If the speed specified for the motor for each axis exceeds the speed
specified in the corresponding parameter, this function immediately
and automatically overrides that speed so that it does not exceed the
setting of the parameter. This means that the speeds on the X, Y, and
Z axes that have been compensated for by the attitude control B
function can be clamped at the execution level.
If, during axial movement, the speed on any axis exceeds the speed
specified in parameter No. 15621, this function immediately and
automatically overrides that speed so that it does not exceed the
setting of the parameter. The override is applied to all axes and,
therefore, there will occur no deviations from the path under
interpolation. In addition, the override automatically increases so that
the speed will not decrease more than necessary. The override can
never exceed 100%, so that a speed exceeding the specified value will
never be generated.
This automatic override function overrides a speed in the cycle
following the one in which an excessive speed is detected and,
therefore, the parameter value will be slightly exceeded.
If a command that causes the setting of parameter No. 15621 to be
exceeded is issued, the override constantly changes and, therefore, the
feedrate of the nozzle head will not be constant even in the same
command block. In normal machining, specify parameter No. 15621
so that no override is applied.
This function is effective to not only automatic operation but also feed
in all modes such as jog and handle feed.

With the "G91 G01 X4. A360. F10000" command, the override is
applied as shown below. The axis name A represents the fourth axis.

[If this function is disabled] [If this function is enabled]

Speed Speed
Maximum speed
on the X axis
Maximum speed
on the Y axis

A axis speed
A axis speed
0 0

Y axis speed Y axis speed

Maximum speed
X axis speed on the Y axis
Maximum speed X axis speed
on the X axis

- 117 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Interaction control
For interaction control of the offset nozzle, the interaction ratio can be
set using parameters even when compensation of the β axis does not
apply to the command specifying the α axis.
Assume that the number of gear teeth of the α axis is specified in
parameter No. 15617 and that the number of gear teeth of the β axis is
specified in parameter No. 15618. The interaction ratio is obtained by
dividing the value of parameter No. 15617 by the value of parameter
No. 15618. The direction of rotation in interaction compensation can
be set by parameter No. 15602.

Reference position return order

When an offset nozzle is used, first return the α and β axes to their
respective reference positions, then return the X, Y, and Z axes. If the
X, Y, and Z axes are returned before the fourth (α) and fifth (β) axes
are returned, the absolute coordinates for the X, Y, and Z axes deviate.

Arm length compensation

When nozzles are changed to suit the workpiece to be machined, the
length of the second arm varies. Therefore, reference position return is
required before nozzle head fixing can be controlled properly. In such
a case, by using G71 (arm length compensation) to reset a new nozzle
length, nozzle head fixing can be controlled without the need for a
reference position return. For details, refer to the FS16i-LB operator's
manual.

Position display
- Displaying relative and absolute positions
In the nozzle head fixing mode, the displayed position of the X, Y,
and Z axes is not affected by the distance of movement of the α and β
axes. In the independent axis mode, the displayed position of the X, Y,
and Z axes are updated according to the distance of movement of the
X, Y, and Z axes as changed by the α and β axes.

- Displaying the position of the machine

In the nozzle head fixing mode, the displayed position of the X, Y,
and Z axes are updated according to the distance of movement of the
X, Y, and Z axes as changed by the α and β axes.
In the independent axis mode, the displayed position of the X, Y, and
Z axes is not affected by the α and β axes.

- Position display in servo off

The displayed incremental and absolute positions of the X, Y, and Z
axes are updated according to the follow-up values of the α and β axes.
The displayed machine position of the X, Y, and Z axes is not affected
by the follow-up values of the α and β axes.

- W-axis tracing
The W axis can be added to the 6th axis as a tracing axis.

- 118 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

Cautions
Consider the length of the arm when specifying overtravel because
overtravel is monitored with the machine coordinates.

In the nozzle head fixing mode, the distances of movement along the
X, Y, and Z axes caused by the rotation about the α and β axes are
added to those of the X, Y, and Z axis move commands. The speed on
each axis may, therefore, be higher than the actually specified speed.
For this reason, upper limits must be sets on the rapid traverse rates
and machining feedrates on the α and β axes so that the speeds in head
fixing operation do not exceed the upper speed limits of the motors.
The maximum speeds on the X, Y, and Z axes that can be generated
due to the rotation about the α and β axes can be determined with the
following formula:
Fmax＝L×Fr
Fmax : Maximum speed on the X, Y, or Z axis
L : Length of the first or second arm
Fr : Speed on the α or β axis
Example)
For rapid traverse
Parameter No. 1420, α axis (Fα): 8000 deg/min
β axis (Fβ): 10000 deg/min
Parameter No. 15615, first arm (L1): 120mm
Parameter No. 15616, second arm (L2): 100mm

Fxy = L1×α
= 120×2π/360×8000=16755mm/min
Fyz = L2×Fβ
= 100×2π/360×10000=17453mm/min

Due to the rotation about the α axis, move commands with up to 16.8
mm/min can be issued for the X and Y axes, and due to the rotation
about the β axis, move commands with up to 17.5 mm/min can be
issued for the Y and Z axes.
It is, therefore, necessary to determine the rapid traverse rates on the α
and β axes so that the rapid traverse rates on the individual axes plus
the maximum speeds do not exceed the speed limits for the motors.
With attitude control B, consider this thoroughly when selecting
motors.

To operate the machine tool in the nozzle head fixing mode, specify
the same gain and time constant for the X, Y, Z, α, and β axes. If
different gain and time constants are specified, the axes may not work
well together.

Due to attitude control, the compensation pulses output for the X, Y,

and Z axes change from block to block. Only acceleration/deceleration
after interpolation is effective to these interpolation pulses. It is
necessary to specify a post-interpolation time constant that can
accommodate sufficiently any abrupt compensation pulse changes
between blocks.

- 119 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Signal
- Attitude control B speed clamp select signal
OTPMX2<G224#7>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Allows selection between maximum feedrate parameters for the
automatic feedrate override function in attitude control B.
[Operation] When the signal (OTPMX2) is set to 0, parameter No. 15621 takes
effect.
When the signal (OTPMX2) is set to 1, parameter No. 15622 takes
effect.

- Attitude control mode select signal

ALNAXS<G226#2>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Selects whether the nozzle is operated in nozzle head fixing mode or
independent axis mode, during manual operation.
[Operation] When the attitude control mode select signal (ALNAXS) is set to 0,
the nozzle is operated in nozzle head fixing mode.
When the attitude control mode select signal (ALNAXS) is set to 1,
the nozzle is operated in independent axis mode.
Manual reference position return is always performed in independent
axis mode, regardless of the state of the mode select signal. Attitude
control is enabled once reference position return has been completed.

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G224 OTPMX2

G226 ALNAXS

Parameter

1020 Axis names used in the program

[Data type] Byte axis

Select the names of the 4th and 5th axes from A, B, C, U, and V, and
set the relevant values. When W-axis tracing is selected, select W as
the name of the 6th axis.

Axis name Setting value Axis name Setting value

A 65 U 85
B 66 V 86
C 67 W 87

- 120 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15600 NFX RNC MIA
[Data type] Bit
MIA When attitude control B is applied in G53 mode, the nozzle is
operated in:
0: Nozzle head fixing mode
1: Independent axis mode (Proximity point search and program
restart are disabled for a program which includes G53.)

RNC Whether movement along an angular axis updates the workpiece

coordinates and relative coordinates along the X-, Y-, and Z-axes,
during manual reference position return
0: Updates
1: Does not update

NFX Memory operation for machine adjustment is performed in:

0: Nozzle head fixing mode (default)
1: Independent axis mode

CAUTION
When NFX = 1, the actual coordinates of the end
point will differ from those specified in the program.
Set NFX to 0 after machine adjustment.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15601 PA5 PA4
[Data type] Bit
PA4 The α axis rotates:
0: In the same direction as that defined for the reference position.
1: In the opposite direction to that defined for the reference
position.
PA5 The β axis rotates:
0: In the same direction as that defined for the reference position.
1: In the opposite direction to that defined for the reference
position.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15602 FMX OSL TGC
[Data type] Bit
TGC For interaction control, the rotation of the β axis is specified in a
command:
0: Using a sign different from that used for the α axis rotation
command.
1: Using the same sign as that used for the α axis rotation
command.
OSL In the stroke check before move, the offset of attitude control B is:
0: Not considered.
1: Considered.

- 121 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

FMX If an offset-type nozzle is used, the cutting speed is:

0: Not clamped.
1: Clamped in consideration of the maximum speed after attitude
control.

15610 Mechanical zero-degree position offset of the α axis

15611 Mechanical zero-degree position offset of the β axis

[Data type] 2-word
[Unit of data] 0.001deg
[Valid data range] 0 to 360000
[Standard setting value] 0, 90000, 180000, 270000
Set the mechanical zero-degree position offset for the α and β axes.

15612 Maximum speed for machining feed about the α axis

15613 Maximum speed for machining feed about the β axis

[Data type] 2-word
[Unit of data] deg/min
[Valid data range] 6 to 15000
Set the maximum speed for machining feed about the α and β axes.
When attitude control is performed in synchronization with the move
command along the X-, Y-, and Z-axes, the nozzle is moved along the
X-, Y-, and Z- axes at a lower speed corresponding to that when the
rotation speed about the α or β axis is clamped to the maximum speed.
When interaction control is specified, the same value must be set for
the α and β axes.

15615 1st arm length

15616 2nd arm length

[Data type] 2-word
[Unit of data] 0.001mm (mm output)
0.0001inch (inch output)
[Valid data range] 0 to 500000
Set the length of the first and second arms.

15617 Number of interaction gear teeth of the α axis (TGMLM)

[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range] 0 to 127
When the number of the gear teeth exceeds the above range, specify a
value divisible by the greatest common divisor of the number of the
gear teeth of the α axis and the number of the gear teeth of the β axis.
Example)
When the number of the α axis gear teeth is 300, and the number
of the β axis gear teeth is 200
Since 300:200= 3:2, specify 3 for the α axis and 2 for the β axis.

- 122 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

15618 Number of interaction gear teeth of the β axis (TGMLS)

[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range] 0 to 127
β axis interaction compensation is calculated using the number of α
axis interaction gear teeth, TGMLM of parameter No. 15617, and this
parameter value. The result is automatically specified for the β axis.
TGMLS
β axis interaction compensation = α axis movement distance ×
TGMLM

15619 Nozzle length

[Data type] 2-word
[Unit of data]
Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
[Valid data range] Sum of the values of parameters No. 15616 and No. 15619 ≤ 500000
Set the nozzle length.
When G71 is specified, the value specified with address R is set to this
parameter.

15621 Maximum speed 1 after attitude control

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] mm/min
[Valid data range] 0 to 240000
[Standard setting value] Specify the maximum speed after attitude control. The speed on each
axis may be overridden so as not to exceed this setting.
The maximum speed check is not performed on an axis for which 0 is
set.

15622 Maximum speed 2 after attitude control

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] mm/min
[Valid data range] 0 to 240000
[Standard setting value] Specify the maximum speed after attitude control. The speed on each
axis may be overridden so as not to exceed this setting. This parameter
is effective when the attitude control B speed clamp select signal
(G224#7, OTPMX2) is 1. When OTPMX2 is 0, parameter No. 15621
is effective. Parameter No. 15621 is effective to an axis for which 0 is
set in this parameter.

- 123 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

7.2 TEACHING BOX INTERFACE

Overview
If a teaching box interface option is specified, the JD36A or JD36B
connector of the motherboard can be used as a teaching box interface.
The parameter No.15640 specifies which connector to be used.
The teaching box reads the coordinates of the taught position from the
CNC, converts them to NC commands, then registers the commands in
CNC program memory. The teaching box is not supplied by FANUC;
it must be manufactured or supplied by the machine tool builder. This
section describes the specifications of the interface used to connect the
teaching box.

Interconnection
Connect as follows:

Mother
-board

<1> Prepare a relay circuit on the operator's panel, and receive signals
from the teaching box at this relay circuit.
<2> Separate the signals received at the relay circuit into two groups.
Direct one group (RS-232C interface signals) to the JD36A or
JD36B connector of the motherboard of the CNC, and the other
group (I/O signals) to I/O cards through the operator's panel
circuit.
<3> Prepare a power supply for the teaching box on the operator's
panel and supply power to the teaching box through the relay
circuit.
<4> It is recommended that an emergency stop button be installed on
the teaching box. This emergency stop button should be handled
together with the emergency stop button on the operator's panel.
<5> Teaching box exclusive right signal (input) TBES <G226#6>
The CNC can always communicate with a teaching box if it is
available. If the CNC is started with no teaching box connected,
or if the PMC, or macro executor tries to use the I/O interface, it
is necessary to switch the exclusive right.

- 124 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

Setting bit 0 (TBE) of parameter No. 15641 to "1" can switch the
communication exclusive right according to the teaching box
exclusive right signal (TBES). Resetting the TBES signal to "0"
relinquishes the exclusive right to communicate with the teaching
box. Setting the TBES signal to "1" keeps communication with
the teaching box.
Basically the CNC tries to respond to a conversation request
from the teaching box whenever the request is made. It is
recommended that the teaching box have a teaching box
enable/disable switch that can be used to stop communication as
required. When you want to use the TBES signal, switch it using
the teaching box enable/disable switch. If you do not want use it,
stop communication using the enable/disable switch.

RS-232C interface
The interface for the teaching box complies with the RS-232C
standard.

Software interface
- Communication
The CNC can always communicate with the teaching box. The
communication conditions are: Baud rate 4800, two stop bits, and no
parity.

- 125 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

- Conversation mode
One conversation session consists of two communication phases. The
conversation begins when the teaching box requests it, and the CNC
responds to the request.
(a) When the teaching box sends data to the CNC
Header plus data

CNC Header plus completion code TB

(b) When the teaching box requests data from the CNC
Header plus data

CNC Header plus completion code TB

plus data

- Transmission format
One transmission message is configured as shown below.

DC2 Header Data Data Data DC4

(a) The transmission message must begin with DC2 and end with
DC4.

- Headers
(b) Headers
ASCII A: Conversation check
B: DI transmission
C: DO transmission
D: Machine position data (workpiece coordinates)
E: Laser setting data request
F: Laser setting data registration
G: Current program number (program number,
sequence number, the number of blocks relative to
the start block)
H: Program number registration
I: Program number deletion
J: Specified-block read
K: Specified-block write (insertion)
L: Specified-block deletion
M: Sequence number search
N: MDI operation request
O: Nozzle-tip machine position data
P: Three-dimensional conversion data request
Q: Three-dimensional conversion data registration
R: Expansion nonvolatile memory read
S: Expansion nonvolatile memory write
T: Step forward
U: Step reverse

- 126 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

Notes
1 A command with header H, I, J, K, L, or M is acceptable only
during the jog or handle mode.
2 A commands with headers N, T, and U are acceptable only
during the MDI mode.

Data
(c) Data
The data must be represented in ASCII code. (Hexadecimal or
NC data is external code.)
The data is sent and received as described below.
• DI/DO data
Send the DI/DO data in ascending order of address.
• Communication data
Convert the data to hexadecimal and send it starting at the
lowest byte.
First byte Second byte Third byte Fourth byte
• Data restoration
When you restore the received data to its original form,
arrange it starting at the lowest byte.
Fourth byte Third byte Second byte First byte

8-digit O number
When the 8-digit O number options is added and bit 3 (TB0) of
parameter No. 15641 is set to 1, the program numbers, block numbers,
and sequence numbers used with the following headers are expanded
from 2-byte to 4-byte format:
G, H, I, J, K, L, M

Completion code
• Completion code
The CNC always attaches a completion code to its transmission
message to indicate to the teaching box whether the
communication was normal. The completion code consists of two
bytes. The upper byte is sent before the lower.

(Example) Completion code 32 DC2N32DC4

Completion codes
Upper byte Lower byte Meaning
0 0 Normal end
A command was rejected because command acceptance was disabled.
0 1
(The CNC mode (JOG or MDI) was incorrect.)
0 2 The data length is incorrect.
0 3 A specified axis name is incorrect.
0 4 The specified command (header) is in an invalid format.
The memory area of program is insufficient. Remove any unnecessary
0 5
programs.
0 6 A specified program number was not found.
0 7 A specified sequence number was not found.

- 127 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Upper byte Lower byte Meaning

An end of record code (%) was sent during writing to a specified block.
0 8
Make sure so that "%" is not sent.
The number of registered records exceeds 125 (basic), or 200, 400, or
0 9
1000 (option).
An attempt was made to register a program with a number with which
1 0
another was already registered.
1 1 A specified program number does not fall within the range of 1 to 9999.
An attempt was made to edit programs No. 8000 to 8999, or programs
No. 9000 to 9999. This alarm occurs if the specification of a parameter
1 2
inhibits the editing of such programs. See the description of NC
parameter No. 3202 for details.
1 3 The number of specified blocks exceeds 9999.
An attempt was made to write more than 99 characters to a specified
1 4
block.
1 5 The delete command is incorrect.
1 6 The macro program is incorrect.
An attempt was made to read more than 120 characters from a specified
1 7
block.
A program cannot be edited by teaching, because background editing
1 8
occurs in the NC.
A specified program number, sequence number, or block length has a
1 9
negative value.
An end of record code (%) was detected during reading from a specified
2 0
block. This means that the last block was read.
In a sequence number search, a non-numeric item was specified for a
3 0
program or block number.
During teaching box MDI operation, a numeric value was specified with
3 1
no address specified.
3 2 During teaching box MDI operation, command O or N was issued.
During teaching box MDI operation, a specified numeric value consists
3 3
of more than eight digits (excluding a minus sign).
3 4 During teaching box MDI operation, an invalid address was specified.
During teaching box MDI operation, an MDI operation was requested
3 5
during the execution of another program.
In area R of the PMC, an error occurred during the setting of the DI/DO
3 6
extended area.
For the step forward or step reverse function, a macro statement was
5 0
specified.
For the step forward or step reverse function, an invalid G code was
5 1
specified.
The next command was rejected because it was issued during execution
5 3
of the step forward or step reverse function.
5 5 No option was specified for the step forward or step reverse function.

- 128 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

Block number
A block number is determined by counting the number of semicolons
(EOBs), starting from the beginning of the program. For a program
having only an O-number, block number 1 is assumed.
O0100; Block number 1
N0001 ; block number 2
N0002 ; block number 3
N0003 ; block number 4

Conversation format
(a) Conversation check
The teaching box (TB) can check whether it can communicate
with the CNC.
TB⇒CNC
DC2 A DC4

CNC⇒TB
DC2 A Completion code DC4

[Example]
Assume the CNC sends the following message to the TB:
DC2 A DC4
12 41 14
The TB will respond to it with the completion code:
DC2 A 0 0 DC4
12 41 30 30 14

(b) DI (TB ⇒ PMC signal) transmission

The TB can send data to the internal relay area. (For area setting,
see the Parameter section later.)

TB⇒CNC
DC2 B DC4

1st byte nth byte

CNC⇒TB
DC2 B Completion code DC4

[Example]
Assume that the DI signal data area is mapped at four bytes
from R980 to R983 in the internal relay area and that the
following data is sent to the DI signal data area.
R980 89H (10001001)
R981 ABH (10101011)
R982 CDH (11001101)
R983 EFH (11101111)
The following message is sent out:
DC2 B 8 9 A B C D E F DC4
12 42 38 39 41 42 43 44 45 46 14

- 129 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

When the CNC receives this message, it responds with the

completion code:
DC2 B 0 0 DC4
12 42 30 30 14

(c) DO (PMC ⇒ TB signal) transmission

The TB can read data from the internal relay area. (For area
setting, see the Parameter section later.)
TB⇒CNC
DC2 C DC4

CNC⇒TB
DC2 C Completion code

1st byte 2nd byte

DC4

nth byte

[Example]
Assume that the DO signal data area is mapped at four bytes
from R988 to R991 in the internal relay area and this area
contains data shown below:
R988 9AH
R989 BCH
R990 DEH
R991 F0H

Assume that the TB sends the following message to the

CNC:
DC2 C DC4
12 43 14
DC2 C 0 0 9 A B C D E F 0 DC4
12 42 30 30 39 41 42 43 44 45 46 30 14
The CNC will respond with:

The C command may fail to read the expected signal state

with a single communication. The reason for this is that the
CNC, PMC, and teaching box differ in signal read timing. It
is, therefore, recommended that a retry process be
performed in the teaching box or that a timer that enables
adjustment of the start of the C command be added.

- 130 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

(d) Machine position data request (Workpiece coordinate position)

The workpiece coordinate position along the axis specified by
the CNC can be read by specifying the name of that axis.
TB⇒CNC
DC2 D DC4
Axis name 0: X-axis 5: 6th axis
1: Y-axis 6: 7th axis
2: Z-axis 7: 8th axis
3: 4th axis A: All axes
4: 5th axis

CNC⇒TB
DC2 D Completion code

DC4

1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte

[Example]
When the X-coordinate of the workpiece coordinate
position in the machine coordinate system is 12345.678, if
the TB requests the workpiece coordinate position data, the
following processing is performed. (Note that 12345678 is
0BC614EH in hexadecimal.)

Assume that the TB sends the following request to the CNC:

DC2 D 0 DC4
12 44 30 14

DC2 D 0 0 4 E 6 1 B C 0 0 DC4
12 44 30 30 34 45 36 31 42 43 30 30 14
The CNC will respond with:

For -12345678, the following data is returned because it is

EF439EB2H in hexadecimal:
DC2 D 0 0 B 2 9 E 4 3 E F DC4

(e) Laser setting data request

Laser setting data can be read from the CNC.
TB⇒CNC
DC2 E DC4
Data
0: Contouring output power
1: Contouring pulse frequency
2: Contouring pulse duty cycle
3: Piercing output power
4: Piercing pulse frequency
5: Piercing pulse duty cycle
6: Assist gas selection
7: Flow pattern selection

- 131 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

CNC⇒TB
Completion
DC2 E code DC4

1st byte 2nd byte

[Example]
Assume that the contouring output power is 1000 W. This
example illustrates how the CNC requests and receives data
from the TB. Note that 1000 is 03E8H in hexadecimal.

Assume the TB sends the following request to the CNC:

DC2 E 0 DC4
12 45 30 14

The CNC will respond with:

DC2 E 0 0 E 8 0 3 DC4
12 45 30 30 45 38 30 33 14

(f) Laser setting data registration

Laser setting data can be set with values.
TB⇒CNC
DC2 F DC4

1st byte 2nd byte

Data
0: Contouring output power
1: Contouring pulse frequency
2: Contouring pulse duty cycle
3: Piercing output power
4: Piercing pulse frequency
5: Piercing pulse duty cycle
6: Assist gas selection
7: Flow pattern selection
CNC⇒TB
DC2 F Completion code DC4

(g) Current program number request

The program number, block number, and sequence number of the
executed program can be obtained.
CNC⇒TB
Completion
DC2 G code

Program number

1st byte 2nd byte

Block number

3rd byte 4th byte

DC4 Sequence number

5th byte 6th byte

- 132 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

CAUTION
1 The program number and block number that can
be read with header G are those related to an
executed program. Header G cannot be used to
read the block number of a program currently
under teaching editing. To read it, use a sequence
number search by means of header M.
2 The program and block numbers that can be read
with header G are updated when the memory or
tape mode is executed. No program or block
number is used during the MDI operation. So,
program and block numbers are assumed to be 0.
3 When a block number is requested during the
memory mode, it is returned as 0 if the OP
(automatic operation in progress) signal is on.

(h) Program number registration

The program area is secured for a specified number.
TB⇒CNC
DC2 H DC4

1st byte 2nd byte

CNC⇒TB
Completion
DC2 H code DC4

CAUTION
1 The H command is equivalent to pressing
O****+INSERT from the MDI panel and, therefore,
no ;(EOB) is inserted. To insert an EOB, write one
by specifying block 0 with the K command.
More specifically, issue the commands in
combination as follows:
Example) To register O0001
Program number
DC2 H 0 1 0 0 DC4

Program Block
Block number Data
number length
DC2 K 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 ; DC4

- 133 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

(i) Program number deletion

The program with a specified program number is deleted.
TB⇒CNC
DC2 I DC4 Program number

1st byte 2nd byte

CNC⇒TB
DC2 I Completion code DC4

(j) Specified-block read

By specifying a program number and block number (counted
from the first block), the corresponding NC data and its block
length (number of characters) can be read.
TB⇒CNC
DC2 J Program number

1st byte 2nd byte

DC4 Block number

3rd byte 4th byte

CNC⇒TB
DC2 J Completion code

DC4

Block length NC data

The following example illustrates how to read the NC data with a

block length 18 (12H in hexadecimal) of block number 3 (0003H
in hexadecimal) of program number 1000 (03E8H in
hexadecimal).

Assume the TB sends the following message to the CNC:

DC2 J E 8 0 3 0 3 0 0 DC4
12 4A 45 38 30 33 30 33 30 30 14

The block length and data will be read as follows:

DC2 J 0 0 1 2 G 0 0 X 0 Y - 9 9 9
12 4A 30 30 31 32 47 30 30 58 30 59 2D 39 39 39

9 9 9 A 0 B 0 ; DC4
39 39 39 41 30 42 30 3B 14

CAUTION
If the J command is sent with OP (automatic
operation in progress) set to 0, the program
execution pointer (cursor) moves to the block from
which data has been read. The pointer does not
move if OP is set to 1.

- 134 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

(K) Specified-block write

By specifying a program number, block number, block length,
and NC data, the NC data can be written into the block that
follows the specified block.
TB⇒CNC
DC2 K Program number

1st byte 2nd byte

Block number

3rd byte 4th byte

DC4

Block length NC data

CNC⇒TB
Completion
DC2 K code DC4

CAUTION
1 If you want insert NC data as the nth block, specify
block number n-1. It will be inserted after the EOB
of the (n-1)th block.
2 More than one block can be inserted with one
instruction. One instruction can specify up to 99
characters.

(l) Specified-block deletion

Specifying a program number and block number can delete the
corresponding block.
TB⇒CNC
DC2 L Program number

1st byte 2nd byte

DC4 Block number

3rd byte 4th byte

CNC⇒TB
Completion
DC2 L code DC4

(m) Sequence number search

By specifying a program number and sequence number, a search
can be performed for the sequence number while counting the
number of blocks from the beginning of the program. Once the
search has been completed, the program number and block
number can be read.
TB⇒CNC
DC2 M Program number

1st byte 2nd byte

DC4 Sequence number

3rd byte 4th byte

- 135 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

CNC⇒TB
M Completion
DC2 code

Program number

1st byte 2nd byte

DC4 Block number

3rd byte 4th byte

CAUTION
Create a sequence number as a 4-digit N code
during program creation. The CNC searches for a
sequence number using a 4-digit N code as a key.

(n) MDI operation

MDI operation is enabled by specifying NC data, using the
number of characters in the NC data.
TB⇒CNC
DC2 N DC4

Number of characters NC data

in NC data

CNC⇒TB
DC2 N Completion code DC4

[Example]
If the specified NC data is G00X0Y-999999A0C0;, the
number of characters in it is 18 (12H in hexadecimal).
DC2 N 1 2 G 0 0 X 0 Y - 9 9 9
12 4E 31 32 47 30 30 58 30 59 2D 39 39 39

9 9 9 A 0 C 0 ; DC4
39 39 39 41 30 43 30 3B 14

CAUTION
1 The above NC data can be transmitted during MDI
operation only if both STL and SPL are off (neither
automatic operation is being activated nor
automatic operation is at a halt).
2 Automatic operation begins after the transmission
of the NC data.
3 Set 1 in bit 7 (MCL) of parameter No. 3203 before
attempting to use the N command.

- 136 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

(o) Nozzle-tip machine position data request

The machine position data of a nozzle tip can be read by
specifying the axis name.
TB⇒CNC
DC2 O DC4
Axis name 0: X-axis 5: 6th axis
1: Y-axis 6: 7th axis
2: Z-axis 7: 8th axis
3: 4th axis A: All axes
4: 5th axis

CNC⇒TB
O Completion
DC2 code

DC4

1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte

(p) Three-dimensional conversion data request

It is possible to read the coordinates of conversion points (P0, P1,
P2, P3, Q0, Q1, Q2, Q3) of the three-dimensional conversion
function registered as setting data.
TB⇒CNC
DC2 P DC4

Conversion 0: Point P0 Axis name 0: X-axis

point 1: Point P1 1: Y-axis
2: Point P2 2: Z-axis
3: Point P3
4: Point Q0
5: Point Q1
6: Point Q2
7: Point Q3

CNC⇒TB

DC2 P

DC4

1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte

- 137 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

(q) Three-dimensional conversion data registration

It is possible to set the coordinates of conversion points
(reference position and target points) of the three-dimensional
conversion function.
TB⇒CNC
DC2 Q

Conversion 0: Point P0 Axis name 0: X-axis

point 1: Point P1 1: Y-axis
2: Point P2 2: Z-axis
3: Point P3
4: Point Q0
5: Point Q1
6: Point Q2
7: Point Q3

DC4

1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte

CNC⇒TB
Completion
DC2 Q code DC4

(r) Battery-powered memory read

Data can be read from battery-powered memory by specifying
the target read area with its start address as the base address, and
the number of bytes.
TB⇒CNC
DC2 R

1st byte 2nd byte

Base address
DC4

3rd byte 4th byte

Number of bytes

CNC⇒TB
Completion
DC2 R code

Data
DC4

Data

- 138 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

[Example]
Assume that the target read data is 8 bytes in an area with
base address 1FA0 as shown below:
High Low
1FA0H 31H 30H
1FA2H 33H 32H
1FA4H 42H 41H
1FA6H 44H 43H

Issue a request as follows:

DC2 R A 0 1 F 0 8 0 0 DC4
12 52 41 30 31 46 30 38 30 30 14

DC2 R 0 0 3 0 3 1 3 2 3 3 4 1
12 52 30 30 33 30 33 31 33 32 33 33 34 31

The following data will be read:

4 2 4 3 4 4 DC4
34 32 34 33 34 34 14

(s) Battery-powered memory write

Data can be written to battery-powered memory by specifying
the target write area with its start address as the base address, the
write data, and the number of bytes in the write data.
TB⇒CNC
DC2 S

1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte

DC4

Data

CNC⇒TB
Completion
DC2 S code DC4

- 139 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

[Example]
Assume that the following write data is written to an area with
base address 21A0 as shown below:
High Low
21A0H 01H 23H
21A2H 45H 67H
21A4H 89H ABH
21A6H CDH EFH

Issue a request as follows:

DC2 S A 0 2 1 0 8 0 0 2 3 0 1
12 53 41 30 32 31 30 38 30 30 32 33 30 31

6 7 4 5 A B 8 9 E F C D DC4
36 37 34 35 41 42 38 39 45 46 43 44 14
The specified data will be written to the specified area.

Interface between the PMC and teaching box

The DI/DO signals transferred between the PMC and teaching box are
mapped at addresses R980 to R995 in the internal relay area. Note that
these addresses cannot be used for internal relaying. Of these
addresses, R980 to R995 are assigned to the DI and DO signals as
shown below.
Addresses R980 to R983: DI signal
Addresses R988 to R991: DO signal
Four bytes for DI and DO can be defined freely.
Bit 1 (TBX) of parameter No. 15641 can be used to specify whether to
increase or decrease the number of DI/DO signals and whether to
change the area.
If bit 1 (TBX) of parameter No. 15641 is set to "1" to expand the
DI/DO signals, some other parameters must be specified, as described
below.
(1) Specifying the start address of the area
Set the start address of the area to which DI signals are
assigned, in parameter No. 15638. Set the start address of
the area to which DO signals are assigned, in parameter No.
15639.
(2) Specifying the capacity
Sets the DI signal capacity, in bytes, in parameter No.
15643. Sets the DO signal capacity, in bytes, in parameter
No. 15644.

- 140 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

(t) Step forward

The program is forwarded on a block-by-block basis, starting
from a specified block.
TB⇒CNC
C2 T DC4

CNC⇒TB
Completion
DC2 T code

DC4 Block number

1st byte 2nd byte

Procedure
Specify one of the following as the start block:
(1) Block executed in step forward or step reverse mode
(2) Block executed in memory mode
(3) Block found by a search performed upon a program restart
(4) Block found by a proximity point search
(5) Block specified by a J or K command in the teaching box.
↓
Select MDI operation mode.
↓
Send a T command from the teaching box.
↓
The tool moves and stops.
↓
Upon acceptance of a T command, the program is forwarded
on a block-by-block basis.

Manual intervention
Set manual operation mode.

CAUTION
See "Notes" in the description of the step reverse
function.

(u) Step reverse

The program is reversed on a block-by-block basis, starting from
a specified block.
TB⇒CNC
DC2 U DC4

CNC⇒TB
Completion
DC2 U code

DC4

1st byte 2nd byte

- 141 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Procedure
Specify one of the following as the start block:
(1) Block executed in step forward or step reverse mode
(2) Block executed in memory mode
(3) Block found by a search performed upon a program restart
(4) Block found by a near point search
(5) Block specified by a J or K command in the teaching box.
↓
Select MDI operation mode.
↓
Send a U command from the teaching box.
↓
The tool moves and stops.
↓
Upon acceptance of a U command, the program is reversed on
a block-by-block basis.

Manual intervention
Set manual operation mode.

Operation
When step reverse is specified, the following occurs:
1) The block immediately preceding the current block is read.
2) If the block contains a move command, the G code of the
move command is preserved.
3) Blocks are searched back for another move command.
4) The end point is obtained based on the block containing the
move command found by the search.
5) A reverse move command is created based on the preserved
G code and end point. Then, the tool starts moving.
6) After the tool stops, skipped blocks are executed.

(Example) N1 N2
N1 G01Xx1Yy1 ; （x1, y1）

N2 G14 ;
N3 G00Xx2Yy2 ; N3 N5
N4 G13 ; N4
（x2, y2） （x3, y3）
N5 G01Xx3Yy3 ;
1) When step reverse is specified after blocks N1 to N3 have
been executed, block N3 is read.
2) Block N3 contains a move command, G00; thus, G00 is
preserved.
3) Block N2 is read. It contains G14, which is not a move
command. Then, the previous block N1 is read.
4) Block N1 contains a move command. The coordinates in
this block are included to specify the end point.
5) Assuming that the coordinates indicate the end point,
command G00Xx1Yy1 is created, then executed.
6) After the tool moves to the end point, G13, an inverse
command of G14; contained in the skipped N2 block, is
executed. Then, the program stops.

- 142 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

Relation with other functions

1) M code output
M code output during step forward or step reverse is
restricted by bit 1 (MEN) of parameter No. 15775.
2) F code and E code
Processed as a block to be executed in both step forward
and step reverse. However, the parameter speed (Parameter
No. 15770) for step reverse is used as the actual feedrate.
If omitted, an alarm occurs during automatic operation after
step forward or step reverse because the feedrate during
automatic operation and the laser power command are not
set.
3) Macro call
Macro calls by G65, the G code (Parameters Nos. 6050 to
6059) for which parameter setting was made, and the M
code (Parameter Nos. 6080 to 6089) are restricted by bit 2
(MCL) of parameter No. 15775.
When bit 0 (NST) of parameter No. 15775 is 0, no macro
call is made during step reverse.
4) Subprogram call
Subprogram calls by the M code (Parameters Nos. 6071 to
6079) for which parameter setting was made, ASCII code
(Parameter Nos. 6090 and 6091), and M98 are restricted by
bit 2 (MCL) of parameter No. 15775.
5) Spatial corner R insertion
G33 operation is restricted by bit 3 (TIE) of parameter No.
15775.
If G33 operation was disabled, G01 is used to operate it.
During step reverse, G01 is used to operate it.

- 143 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

CAUTION
1 For move commands, the coordinates for all axes must be specified by absolute
programming.
2 One of G codes G00, G01, G02, G03, or G12 must be specified in each block.
3 For circular interpolation, one of I, J, and K must be used. Normal processing
cannot be performed by arc radius R programming.
4 During step forward or step reverse, no beam is output.
5 If step forward or step reverse which has already been specified is specified again
before the operation is started (STL, SLP = 1), the second specification is ignored.
6 Those blocks to be executed in step forward or step reverse mode are affected by
the J (specified block read), K (specified block insert), and L (specified block delete)
commands. Once the J, K, or L command is specified, the program points to the
block specified with the command. Then, if the T or U command is specified, the
program points to a block other than that found by a near point search or that
executed in memory mode. When the J, K, or L command must be specified before
the T or U command, appropriate precautions should be applied. For example, first
store the current block into the teaching box. Then, after specifying the J command,
set the relevant block number before specifying the T or U command.
7 When bit 0 (NST) of parameter No. 15775 is 0, one block is surely executed for
each command in step forward or step reverse. A block without movement is also
executed.
8 If the previous block includes no movement command in the first step reverse, a
movement command is searched for. That is, the beginning of the step reverse is
always the movement command.
9 For a program including the execution macro calling G code, take actions as shown
below. Since DO signal STPRCV (F0226#7) is output when a command for step
forward or step reverse is received, read this signal by using the address function
at the beginning of the execution macro. If the read value is 1, make a jump to
M99. Basically, the execution macro during step forward or step reverse cannot
operate. The execution macro calling G code cannot be determined on the NC side
at the preprocessing level, perform processing at the beginning of the called
execution macro. Care needs to be exercised since execution is made from the
beginning of the called execution macro even in step reverse.

G code handling
With the step forward or step reverse function, G codes are handled as
shown below.

G code Function name Step forward Step reverse Remarks

G00 Positioning Valid Valid
G01 Linear interpolation Valid Valid
G02 Circular interpolation Valid Valid G03 for step reverse
G03 Circular interpolation Valid Valid G02 for step reverse
G04 Dwell Ignored Ignored
G05 High-speed remote buffer Ignored Ignored
G06 Unused Ignored Ignored
G07 Unused Ignored Ignored
G08 Advanced preview control Ignored Ignored
G09 Exact stop Ignored Ignored

- 144 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

G code Function name Step forward Step reverse Remarks

G10 Data setting on Ignored Ignored
G11 Data setting off Ignored Ignored
G12 Spatial circular interpolation Valid Valid
G12.1 Polar coordinate interpolation Error Error
G13 Tracing mode on Valid Valid G14 for step forward
G13.1 Polar coordinate interpolation Error Error
G14 Tracing mode off Valid Valid G13 for step forward
G15 Polar coordinate command Error Error
G16 Polar coordinate command Error Error
G17 Ignored Ignored
G18 Plane selection Ignored Ignored
G19 Ignored Ignored
G20 Ignored Ignored
Inch/metric
G21 Ignored Ignored
G22 Error Error
Stored stroke check
G23 Error Error
G24 Piercing Ignored Ignored
G25 Ignored Ignored
Unused
G26 Ignored Ignored
G27 Valid Ignored
G28 Valid Ignored
G29 Reference position return Valid Ignored
G30 Valid Ignored
G30.1 Valid Error
G31 Skip function Error Error
G32 Assist gas Ignored Ignored
G33 Valid Valid G01 for step reverse
Spatial corner R
G34 Valid Ignored
G00 for both step forward and step
G35 Ignored Ignored
reverse
G36 Ignored Ignored
Unused
G37 Ignored Ignored
G38 Ignored Ignored
G39 Ignored Ignored
G40 Ignored Ignored
G41 Cutter compensation Valid Ignored
G42 Valid Ignored
G43 Valid Ignored
Tool length compensation
G44 Valid Ignored
G45 Ignored Ignored
G46 Ignored Ignored
Tool offset
G47 Ignored Ignored
G48 Ignored Ignored
G49 Tool length compensation off Ignored Ignored
G50 Error Error
Scaling
G51 Error Error
G52 Local coordinate system Error Error
G53 Machine coordinate system Valid Valid

- 145 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

G code Function name Step forward Step reverse Remarks

G54 Error Error
G55 Error Error
G56 Error Error
Workpiece coordinate system
G57 Error Error
G58 Error Error
G59 Error Error
G60 Single direction positioning Valid Valid
G61 Exact stop mode Ignored Ignored
G62 Automatic corner override Ignored Ignored
G63 Power control Ignored Ignored
G64 Cutting mode Ignored Ignored
G65 Ignored Ignored
G66 Macro call Ignored Ignored
G67 Ignored Ignored
G68 Three-dimensional coordinate Valid Ignored
G69 conversion Valid Ignored
G70 Unused Ignored Ignored
G71 A axis length compensation Ignored Ignored
G72 Ignored Ignored
G73 Ignored Ignored
G74 Ignored Ignored
G75 Ignored Ignored
G76 Ignored Ignored
G77 Ignored Ignored
Unused
G78 Ignored Ignored
G79 Ignored Ignored
G80 Ignored Ignored
G81 Ignored Ignored
G82 Ignored Ignored
G83 Ignored Ignored
G84 Error Error
Coordinate system rotation
G85 Error Error
G86 Ignored Ignored
G87 Ignored Ignored
Unused
G88 Ignored Ignored
G89 Ignored Ignored
G90 Absolute programming Valid Valid
G91 Incremental programming Ignored Ignored
G92 Coordinate system setting Error Error
G93 Ignored Ignored
G94 Ignored Ignored
G95 Unused Ignored Ignored
G96 Ignored Ignored
G97 Ignored Ignored
G98 Valid Ignored
Three-dimensional conversion
G99 Valid Ignored
G107 Cylindrical interpolation Error Error
G150 Error Error
G151 Normal direction control Error Error
G152 Error Error

- 146 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

Signal
- Teaching box exclusire right signal
TBES<G226#6>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Externally turns communication with the teaching box on/off.
[Operation] The CNC can always communicate with the teaching box provided it
is connected. If the CNC is started while the teaching box is not
connected, or if the PMC and so on try to use the I/O interface, it
becomes necessary to switch the exclusive right.
Setting bit 0 (TBE) of parameter No. 15641 can switch the
communication exclusive right according to the teaching box
exclusive right signal (TBES). Resetting the TBES signal to 0
relinquishes the exclusive right to communicate with the teaching box.
Setting the TBES signal to 1 maintains communication with the
teaching box.

CAUTION
If bit 0 (TBE) of parameter No. 15641 is set to 1,
the CNC issues "DC1" each time the teaching box
exclusive right signal (TBES) is switched from "0"
to "1."
If TBE is set to 0, the CNC issues "DC1" each time
a reset is performed.

Signal
- Step forward or step reverse acceptance signal
STPRCV<F226#7>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Reports the reception status of the step forward or step reverse
command.
[Operation] When the CNC receives the T or U command from the teaching box,
STPRCV is set to 1.
When block operation is completed, STPRCV is set to 0.

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G226 TBES

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F226 STPRCV

- 147 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Parameter
15638 DI area start address

15639 DO area start address

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range] 1 to 999
Set the start addresses of the internal relay areas (R areas) used to
access DI/DO signals from the teaching box. The internal relay areas
having the capacity specified with parameters Nos. 15643 and 15644
are allocated starting from the addresses set here.

15640 Channel to be connected to a teaching box

[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range] 1, 2
Specifies the channel to be connected to a teaching box.
Channel 1 (connector JD36A): Setting value = 1
Channel 2 (connector JD36B): Setting value = 2

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15641 TBO TBA TBX TBE
[Data type] Bit
TBE As the channel of the teaching box, the right to occupy the RS-232C
port is:
0: Always held by the CNC. (Current setting)
1: Switchable by the teaching box exclusive right signal (G226#6,
TBES).
TBX The areas used to access DI/DO signals from the teaching box:
0: Are fixed.
1: Can be expanded.
TBA The state of data transfer to expansion nonvolatile memory is:
0: Not output. (Parameter No. 15642 is disabled.)
1: Output. (Parameter No. 15642 is enabled.)
TBO In the teaching box, an eight-digit program number is:
0: Not used.
1: Used. (The eight-digit program number option is necessary.)

Address to which the state of data transfer to battery-powered memory is

15642 output
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range] 0 to 65528
Once the R or S command has been received from the teaching box,
the following state data is written to battery-powered memory, starting
from the address specified with this parameter:

Address specified with +0 First address containing transfer data

parameter No. 15642 +2 Number of bytes
+4 Completion code
+6 Control bit

- 148 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

Control bit
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
+6 MSTBA
MSTBA＝1: Masks the R or S command.
If the R or S command is received, a completion
code indicating an alarm is output.

15643 Number of DI sets

15644 Number of DO sets

[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] Sets
[Valid data range] 1 to 15 (If 0 is specified, the expansion function is disabled.)
Set the DI/DO signal capacity, in bytes.
Sets the DI signal capacity, in bytes, in parameter No. 15643. Sets the
DO signal capacity, in bytes, in parameter No. 15644.

Internal relay area

Start address
DI
(set in parameter No. 15638)

Parameter No.
15643 specifies
the capacity.
Start address
(set in parameter No. 15639)
DO

Parameter No.
15644 specifies
the capacity.

- 149 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Step forward/reverse function

15770 Feedrate when step forward or step reverse is specified

[Data type] 2-word
[Unit of data] mm/min
[Valid data range] 1 to 240000
Set the feedrate when step forward or step reverse is specified with the
teaching box.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15775 TIE MCL MEN NST

[Data type] Bit

NST During step forward or step reverse
0: Bits 1 (MEN), 2 (MCL), and 3 (TIE) of parameter No. 15775 are
valid.
1: These bits are invalid.
MEN In step forward or step reverse, the M code is:
0: Not output.
1: Output.
MCL In step forward, a macro or submacro call is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled (always disabled during step reverse).
TIE In step forward, spatial corner R is:
0: Enabled (operation is enabled with G01 during step reverse).
1: Disabled.

- 150 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

7.3 W-AXIS TRACING

Overview
The W-axis can be defined on the sixth axis as a tracing axis. See
chapter 6 for details of the tracing control function.

W-axis
The W-axis, (sixth axis) is defined as the axis along which the nozzle
moves linearly, at the end of the five-axis machining head.

The W-axis is attached in the same way as a normal linear axis.

However, it is a dedicated tracing axis attached to the tip of a nozzle,
it is characterized as follows:
(1) W-axis rapid traverse
Because the W-axis must operate in short strokes because of its
axis configuration, it is used with its rapid traverse rate lowered.
A low rapid traverse rate for the W-axis can be set in the sixth
axis part of parameters Nos. 1420 and 1424.
(2) Reference position return
For the W-axis, manual reference position return is performed at
the manual rapid traverse rate. To enable reading of the reference
position return deceleration signal (*DEC) at a stable speed, the
CNC monitors the position error of the axis during feed. If the
*DEC signal is not detected at a sufficiently high speed, an alarm
is issued. This alarm may be often output, because the speed of
W-axis traverse is too low. To suppress this alarm, set the
minimum position error at which no alarm occurs, in the sixth
axis part of parameter No. 1836.
(3) Manual continuous feed
The jog feedrate is determined according to the manual
continuous feedrate setting signal. The jog feedrate determined
this way may be too high for the W-axis command. So, a ladder
program should be created which uses the manual feedrate
override signals *JV0 to *JV15 to clamp the W-axis feedrate to a
safe rate upon reception of the manual feed axis direction
selection signal for the W-axis.

- 151 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Switching between W-axis tracing and Z-axis tracing

When the W-axis tracing option is attached, the tracing axis is the
W-axis. If both the W-axis tracing and Z-axis tracing options are
attached, it is possible to switch the tracing axis between W- and
Z-axes.

Commands
(1) If a G code is used
W-axis tracing
G13 (L0);
Z-axis tracing
G13L2;
(2) If an external signal is used
W-axis tracing
G225#0:ZTRM=0
Z-axis tracing
G225#0:ZTRM=1

NOTE
Before switching the tracing axis, cancel tracing
control.

Parameter

1420 Rapid traverse rate for the axis

1424 Manual rapid traverse rate for the axis

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Increment Valid data range
Unit of data
[Valid data range] system IS-A, IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 1mm/min 30 to 240000 30 to 100000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 96000 30 to 48000

The rapid traverse rate for the W-axis (sixth axis) is specified on the
sixth axis.

1836 Minimum position error at a W-axis reference position return

[Data type] Byte axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 127
If 0 is specified, 128 is assumed.
[Guideline of setting] Highest value with which no alarm occurs at a reference position
return

- 152 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

15541 Coefficient for conversion from W-axis tracing speed to control voltage
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
[Setting method] Set the conversion coefficient obtained using the following formula:
P×4
Conversion coefficient = G × × 2 × 10 -3 × 4096
1000 × Le
where ,
G: Tracing gain (sec-1) Standard value = 30 sec-1
Le: Machine travel per W-axis motor revolution (mm/rev)
P : Number of detected pulse coder pulses per W-axis motor
revolution (p/rev)
Set 2048 when using a serial A or a motor.

- 153 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

7.4 TRACING AXIS SWITCHING

Overview
If the three-dimensional machining function is added with a W-axis
tracing function, setting the tracing axis switching signal (ZTRM) to
"1" switches the tracing axis to the X-axis. This function enables the
Z-axis to trace the manual operation along the X- and Y-axes and
therefore can be used in teaching operation for the workpiece surface.

Signal
- Tracing axis switching signal
ZTRM<G225#0>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Externally switches the tracing axis between the Z-axis and W-axis.
[Operation] When the three-dimensional machining function is added together
with a W-axis tracing function, setting the tracing axis switching
signal (ZTRM) to 1 switches the tracing axis to the Z-axis. To enter
tracing mode, the TCST signal must be set to 1.

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G225 ZTRM

- 154 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

7.5 APPROACH FEED

Overview
If the three-dimensional machining function is added with a W-axis
tracing function, setting the approach feed signal (ZAPR) to "1"
selects the approach feed mode. During the approach feed mode, when
the tracing sensor signal becomes 0 or grater (too close to the
workpiece), jog feed in the X-, Y-, and Z-directions stops. This
function enables the nozzle to stop when it gets too close to the
workpiece during jog feed, and therefore, it can be used in teaching.
To release the stop state, set the approach feed signal (ZAPR) to 0,
turn off the jog feed select signal, then specify jog feed such that the
nozzle is retracted from the workpiece.

Signal
- Approach feed signal
ZAPR<G225#1>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Enables the stopping of jog feed according to the tracing sensor signal.
[Operation] When the three-dimensional machining function is added together
with a W-axis tracing function, setting the approach feed signal
(ZAPR) to 1 selects approach feed mode. During approach feed mode,
when the tracing sensor signal becomes 0 or greater (too close to the
workpiece), jog feed in the X-, Y-, and Z-directions stops.

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G225 ZAPR

Parameter

15552 Minimum position shift for stopping approach

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] 0.001mm
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
[Standard setting value] 50
When the nozzle is moved toward the workpiece by approach feed,
jog feed is stopped once the detected position shift in the negative
direction exceeds the value set in this parameter.

- 155 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

7.6 PROXIMITY POINT SEARCH FUNCTION

Overview
This function can search for the start point of a block located within
the constant distance specified in the appropriate parameter from the
current nozzle position, and position the tool at that position so that
machining can restart at that position.

Operation
After the program is set and the memory operation mode is selected,
triggering a cycle start with the proximity point search signal
(NRSRH) set to "1" causes a search through the program for a block
with the following condition. The search begins at the first block.
When this search starts, the proximity point search in progress signal
(LNSR) and automatic operation started signal (STL) are set to "1".
When a block with the following conditions is found, the nozzle is
positioned at the beginning of this block. After nozzle positioning is
completed, the machine stops, and the automatic operation started
signal (STL) is reset to "0". Under this condition, resetting the
proximity point search signal (NRSRH) to "0" and triggering a cycle
start will reset the LNSR signal and cause machining to begin at the
block found.

Conditions for a block to be searched for

(1) Distance Ls from the start point (Xs, Ys, Zs) of a block to the
current nozzle position (Xp, Yp, Zp) is smaller than distance L
specified in parameter No. 15635.
(2) Distance Le from the end point (Xe, Ye, Ze) of a block to the
current nozzle position (Xp, Yp, Zp) is larger than distance Ls.

- 156 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

Timing chart
The timing chart for a proximity point search is shown below.
When the automatic operation started signal (STL) becomes "0", the
proximity point search signal (NRSRH) should be turned from "1" to
"0".

Proximity point search

signal
NRSRH

Automatic operation
start signal
ST

Automatic operation
started signal
STL

Proximity point search

in progress signal
LNSR

Cautions
1 The program on which to execute the proximity point search
function must be the one that was executed in memory operation
immediately before a proximity point search is executed.
Otherwise, the proximity point search cannot determine the
correct position. The reason for this is that the machine position
at the start of normal operation is stored as the reference position
when a proximity point search is executed. The buffer used to
store this machine position is not provided for each program;
only the position for the program that last performed automatic
operation (MEM, MDI, or DNC) is stored. Thus, a proximity
point search cannot be performed after MDI or DNC operation.
2 A proximity point search cannot be performed on the program
that was active immediately before the power is turned on, after
the power is turned on.
3 While a proximity point search is being executed, a re-search
cannot be performed. Once a proximity point search is executed
and a block is found (G226#0 (NRSCH) = 1, F225#1 (LNSR) =
1, F000#5 (STL) = 0), alarm PS4000 is raised if an attempt is
made to start a cycle again. To perform a re-search, perform a
reset first.
4 If a proximity point search does not find a block in which
distance Ls between the current nozzle position and the start
point of the block is smaller than the value specified in parameter
No. 15635, alarm PS4000 is raised.
5 If, during the execution of a proximity point search, the current
nozzle position is near the stored reference position for the
proximity point search, the nozzle moves to the stored reference
position for the proximity point search.
6 A dwell command is not executed during a proximity point
search.

- 157 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

7 During a proximity point search, all M and T codes are output;

they must be processed by the PMC.
8 Laser power is not output during a proximity point search.
9 If a search target program contains a command related to
reference position return, this command must be followed by an
absolute command. During a search, the G27, G28, G29, and
G30 commands are ignored, and the coordinates are set up again
with the subsequent absolute command.
10 Positioning to the searched-for block is performed on all axes
simultaneously. Upon the completion of positioning, the nozzle
assumes the position at the start point of the block.
11 In a system with attitude control B attached, if the operation of
G53 is not placed in the head fixing mode (bit 3 (MIA) of
parameter No. 15600 = 0), alarm PS4002 is raised.
12 If the nozzle is to be positioned in a block in G33 mode, the
nozzle is positioned at the coordinates specified by the program.
It is not positioned at the end point of the arc automatically
inserted.
13 Tracing in a proximity point search must be W-axis tracing. If
Z-axis tracing is specified, alarm PS4001 is raised.
14 In the program on which a proximity point search is performed,
manual operation must be performed with manual absolute on,
regardless of whether it is before or after machining.
15 After a proximity point search, manual intervention is not
possible before the program is restarted.
16 During a proximity point search, move commands with the
machine coordinate system (G27, G28, G29, G30, and G53) are
ignored.
17 If the end point of a block is near the reference position and the
next block is G27, G28, G29, G30, or G53, this block is assumed
to be near the reference position.

Signal
- Proximity point search signal
NRSRH<G226#0>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Selects the proximity point search function.
[Operation] 1 Place the system in memory mode.
2 Search for the beginning of the program.
3 Set the proximity point search signal (NRSRH) to "1."
4 Press the start button.
5 The above steps execute a proximity point search.
During the search, the proximity point search in progress signal
(LNSR) and the automatic operation started signal (STL) are
output.
6 Upon the completion of the search, the automatic operation
started signal is set to "0."
Then, set the proximity point search signal to "0" and press the
start button.
The proximity point search in progress signal is set to "0" and
machining can restart at the searched-for block.

- 158 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

- Proximity point search in progress signal

LNSR<F225#1>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies the PMC that a proximity point search is in progress.
[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following case:
- When a cycle start is triggered while the proximity point search
signal (NRSRH) is set to 1
This signal is set to 0 in the following case:
- When positioning by means of a proximity point search has been
completed, after which a cycle start is triggered while the
proximity point search signal (NRSRH) is set to 0

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G226 NRSRH

F225 LNSR

Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15630 NMT NMC NSC NRE NSR
[Data type] Bit
NSR During search for a block the automatic operation signal OP (F000#7)
is:
0: Posted.
1: Not posted.
NRE When the proximity point search function attempts positioning to the
end point,
0: Alarm 4000 (No proximity point is found) is raised.
1: The positioning is allowed.
NSC If, with the program restart function (conforming to the laser
specifications) and the proximity point search function, a program is
to restart at the end point of the block into which a spatial corner R is
to be inserted:
0: The program restarts at the program-specified point at which a
corner R is not inserted.
1: The program restarts at the end of the inserted corner R.
NMC With program restart function using attitude control B (laser
specifications) and the proximity point search, positioning is:
0: Executed for all axes at the same time. (Note: Executed in non-
interpolation mode.)
1: Executed for the fourth and fifth axes first, then for the remaining
axes. (Note: Executed in non-interpolation mode.)
NMT If, in a proximity point search, the end point of the block is near the
reference position, and the next block is a block without movement:
0: The system searches for the next proximity point.
1: The system assumes the block without movement to be a
proximity point.

- 159 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

15635 Proximity point distance for a proximity point search

[Data type] 2-word
[Unit of data] 0.001mm
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
Sets the reference distance for proximity point search.
A block is determined to be a proximity point block when distance Ls
from the start point of the block to the current nozzle position is
smaller than the distance specified in parameter No. 15635, and
distance from the end point of the block to the current nozzle position
is larger than distance Ls.

Alarm and message

No. Message Description
4000 P/S ALARM In a proximity point search, no proximity point
has been found until "END OF RECORD."
4001 P/S ALARM In a proximity point search, the tracing axis is the
Z-axis.
4002 G CODE In a proximity point search, G53 is specified in
UNAVAILABLE independent axis mode (bit 3 (MIA) of parameter
DURING SEARCH No. 15600 = 1).

- 160 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

7.7 MANUAL OPERATION IN HAND COORDINATE SYSTEM

Overview
In attitude control A and attitude control B, the coordinate system
defined from the current nozzle position, with the nozzle head
assumed its zero point, is called the hand coordinate system. In the
hand coordinate system defined in an arbitrary space, operation can be
performed on one or more axes at the same time using the feed signal
for a single X, Y, or Z axis, achieving axial movement in the hand
coordinate system.
The use of this function facilitates the positioning of the nozzle when
creating programs through teaching.

Definition of the hand coordinate system

(1) For attitude control A (zero-offset type head)
- The direction of the normal of the nozzle is defined as +Zh.
- Assuming a point that lies on a line parallel to +Y from
point A of the reference position to be point B, the direction
from the nozzle head and parallel to AB is defined as +Yh.
- Assuming the direction of the index finger of the left hand
to be +Yh and the direction of the thumb to be +Zh, the
direction of the middle finger of the left hand that is at right
angles to them is defined as +Xh.
(2) For attitude control B (offset-type head)
- The direction of the normal of the nozzle is defined as +Zh.
- The direction of the arm on the α axis is defined as +Xh.
- Assuming the direction of the middle finger of the left hand
to be +Xh and the direction of the thumb to be +Zh, the
direction of the index finger of the left hand that is at right
angles to them is defined as +Yh.

Jog feed
Jog feed axis direction signals ±X, ±Y and ±Z enable travel in the
direction of ±"Xh, ±Yh, and ±Zh, respectively.
Simultaneous operation of one axis is performed for jog feed using the
hand coordinate system if axes include the α and β axes.
When jog feed axis direction signal ±α and ±β are specified, the
rotation axis operates in the nozzle head fixing mode. When execution
of the command for the rotation axis is stopped, the hand coordinate
system is updated to an new coordinate system. Then, the linear axis
command is executed for the hand coordinate system.

- 161 -
7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Handle feed
When the signal for selecting an axis for manual handle feed, HX, is
turned on, a feed can be performed in the direction of the ±Xh axis
using the manual pulse generator.
In the same way, the ±HY and ±HZ signals enable travel in the
direction of the ±Yh and ±Zh axes.
When hand coordinate system mode select signal HNDCD is 1, handle
feeds using H4 (4th axis: α axis) and H5 (5th axis: β axis) are not
possible.
To perform handle feeds of the α and β axes, the HNDCD signal must
be set to 0. When the signal for selecting an axis for manual handle
feed, H4 or H5, is selected, the machine tool can easily be operated by
coding a ladder program that sets the HNDCD signal to 0.

Fig. 7.7 (a) For attitude control A

Fig. 7.7 (b) For attitude control B

- 162 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 7.THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM

Caution
The manual feed speeds on the X, Y, and Z axes must be the same.

Signal
- Hand coordinate system mode select signal
HNDCD<G226#3>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Enables jog and handle feed in a coordinate system defined from the
current nozzle position, with the nozzle head assumed its zero point.
[Operation] When the hand coordinate system mode select signal (HNDCD) is set
to "1" in manual operation mode, jog and handle feed can be
performed in the hand coordinate system.

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G226 HNDCD

- 163 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

8 CONTROL FUNCTION

- 164 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

8.1 OPTICAL PATH LENGTH COMPENSATION

Overview
The distance between the oscillator and the condensing lens varies as
the reflecting mirror moves along its axis (if there is one). The light
propagation distance at which a stable processing characteristic is
realized is generally limited to within a certain range. In a large
machine, in which the reflecting mirror has to move a long distance
exceeding such a limit because of its mechanical structure, it has been
conventionally impossible to maintain a stable characteristic over the
entire stroke. The optical path length compensation function is
developed to avert this problem. This function consists of an axis to
adjust the length of the optical path. If a move command is issued to
the reflecting mirror, the optical path adjustment axis is automatically
moved to keep the optical path length.

Function selection
When the option for optical path length compensation is specified,
resetting bit 1 (FMS) of parameter No. 15702 to "0" enables optical
path length compensation.

Mechanism to implement control

The mechanism described below is necessary to use optical path
length compensation.
1 Prepare an axis (called the U-axis) that enables the
beam-reflecting mirror block to move linearly in order to change
the light propagation distance.
2 Configure the U-axis so that moving the mirror block changes
the light propagation distance α (1 to 511) times as large as the
distance through which the mirror block moves.
3 Configure the U-axis so that its maximum speed is not lower than
1/α of the total rapid traverse rate of the axis along which the
optical path is changed.
4 Prepare a reference position for all axes including the U-axis.
The length of the optical path is calculated based on the reference
position.
5 Provide a measure to prevent interference between the U-axis
and any other axes.

- 165 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Controlled axes
The following conditions apply to the controlled axes.
1 Either an incremental pulse coder or absolute pulse coder (APC)
can be used for a controlled axis. The two types can be used in
one system; it is allowed to use an incremental for one controlled
axis and an absolute for another.
2 The U-axis can be assigned to any axis from the fourth to the
eighth. Which axis to use is specified using parameter No.
15703.
3 Because the U-axis move command is determined from the move
distance of an axis on which the optical path length varies, a
controlled axis (except the U-axis) on which the optical path
length changes is specified in parameter No. 15700.
4 If the move direction of an axis on which the optical path length
changes does not match the polarity of the change in the optical
path length, the polarity can be inverted using parameter No.
15701 for calculation purposes.
5 Parameter No. 15702 can specify whether to reflect the move
amount of a controlled axis under tracing control in the move
command for the U-axis.
6 Optical path length compensation is available.
The optical path length with all axes (including the U-axis) at the
reference position is regarded as the reference optical path length.
This optical path length can be compensated for error. As a result,
the reference optical path length can be set up regardless of
where the reference position is set up.
If parameter No. 15704 specifies a mirror position compensation
value, setting the optical path length compensation start signal
(LRCS) to "1" with all axes at the reference return position
causes the U-axis to shift automatically from the reference
position by the specified distance, then triggers optical path
length compensation.
For the APC axis, even if it has not returned to the reference
position, the LRCS signal is accepted provided that the reference
position has been established.

- 166 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

Move command calculation and setting

The amount of U-axis movement is calculated as follows:
64
∆Ｕ = （ ± ∆X ± ∆Y ± ∆Z...）
Parameter No.15705
∆U, ∆X, ∆Y, ∆Z... : Move command value for each axis

The U-axis is defined only for the machine coordinate system, which
is updated according to the above calculation.
For axes not specified in parameter No. 15700, the move command
value is assumed to be 0 for calculation purposes. For axes on which
polarity inversion is specified in parameter No. 15701, the algebraic
sign is inverted for calculation purposes. Parameter No. 15705
specifies the ratio of the move distance of an axis on which the optical
path length varies to the distance traveled by the U-axis to resume the
original optical path length.

Activation of optical path length compensation

Optical path length compensation should be activated according to the
following procedure.
1 After the U-axis and all axes selected in parameter No. 15700
(described later) have returned to the reference position, select
the job mode, and set the optical path length compensation start
signal (LRCS) to "1", and optical path length compensation will
begin.
If an APC is used, it is unnecessary to execute a reference
position return for axes for which the reference position has been
established.
2 The optical path length compensation signal (LRCS) is
acceptable only in the jog mode. A ladder program should set the
LRCS signal to "1" after the jog mode is securely selected.
3 The CNC monitors the optical path length compensation start
signal (LRCS) for both its rising and steady states. So, this signal
should stay at "1" as long as optical path length compensation is
being carried out.
4 When optical path length compensation begins, the optical path
length compensation signal (LCIN) becomes "1".
5 Whatever the current operation mode is, optical path length
compensation is stopped when the optical path length
compensation start signal (LRCS) becomes "0".

Optical path length compensation stop

If an emergency stop, servo-off, or U-axis overtravel occurs, the CNC
judges that optical path length compensation cannot continue. The
CNC also sets the coptical path length compensation stop request
signal (CSTP) to "1" and posts it to the PMC.

- 167 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Restart in the stop state

The PMC should be provided with a ladder program that performs the
following restart procedure when the optical path length compensation
stop request signal (CSTP) becomes "1".
1 The optical path length compensation start signal (LRCS) is reset
from "1" to "0" when the optical path length compensation stop
request signal (CSTP) becomes "1".
2 The current operation mode is stored.
3 When the error mentioned above is reset, the jog mode is
selected after the servo preparation completion signal (SA) is
kept at "1" for at least 50 ms.
4 A reference position return is carried out for all axes (except in a
system with an APC).
5 After it is confirmed that a reference position return has been
completed for all axes, the optical path length compensation start
signal (LRCS) is turned from "0" to "1".
6 After it is confirmed that the optical path length compensation
signal (LCIN) is "1", the original operation mode is resumed.

Note
1 The U-axis is provided with overtravel and stored stroke limits.
2 If the mirror block on the U-axis interferes with any axis, a
provision to detect the interference and stop operation should be
made on the machine side.
3 The optical path length compensation start signal (LRCS) must
be kept at "0" in the manual reference position return mode. For
this purpose, a ladder program should select the jog mode after a
reference position return is completed, and then set the optical
path length compensation start signal (LRCS) to "1".
4 The machine coordinates of the U-axis may encounter an error in
0.001 mm units (if the least input increment is IS-B) depending
on a value specified in parameter No. 15704. But it does not
affect the machining characteristic.
5 Before setting the optical path length compensation start signal
(LRCS) to "1" in a machine in which all axes operate on APCs,
allow at least 50 ms after the servo completion signal (SA)
becomes "1"
6 Do not issue a move command (regardless of whether it is
automatic or manual) to the U-axis during optical path length
compensation.
7 An individual machine lock for the U-axis does not work during
optical path length compensation.

- 168 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

Signal
- Optical path length compensation start signal
LRCS<G224#0>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Starts optical path length compensation.
[Operation] Optical path length compensation begins when the optical path length
compensation start signal (LRCS) is set to "1" with all axes at the
reference position. If an axis on which the optical path length changes
moves, the U-axis (optical path length adjustment axis) moves in order
to cancel the change in optical path length and resume the original
optical path length.

- Optical path length compensation signal

LCIN<F223#0>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Informs the PMC that optical path length compensation is under way.
[Output condition] This signal becomes “1” when:
- Optical path length compensation begins.
This signal becomes “0” when:
- The optical path length compensation start signal (LRCS)
becomes "0".
- The optical path length compensation stop request signal (CSTP)
becomes "1".

- Optical path length compensation stop request signal

CSTP<F223#1>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Informs the PMC that optical path length compensation cannot
continue.
[Output condition] This signal becomes “1” when:
- An emergency stop, servo-off, or U-axis overtravel occurs.
This signal becomes “0” when:
- The cause of the stop request is removed, and the optical path
length compensation start signal (LRCS) is acceptable.

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G224 LRCS

F223 CSTP LCIN

- 169 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15700 8 7 6 5 4 Z Y X
[Data type] Bit
X to 8 0: Axis on which the length of the optical path changes (used as a
basis for calculation of the U-axis move command)
1: Axis on which the length of the optical path does not change (not
used as a basis for calculation of the U-axis move command)

CAUTION
Specify 0 for non-existing axes.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15701 8 7 6 5 4 Z Y X
[Data type] Bit
X to 8 0: Does not invert the polarity of the calculated move amount for
the axis.
1: Inverts the polarity of the calculated move amount for the axis.

CAUTION
Specify 0 for non-existing axes.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15702 MRO MCO FMS TXC
[Data type] Bit
TXC 0: Specifies to include the move amount of a controlled axis under
tracing control in the move command calculation for the U-axis.
1: Specifies not to include the move amount of a controlled axis
under tracing control in the move command calculation for the
U-axis.
FMS 0: Specifies to enable optical path length compensation.
1: Specifies to disable optical path length compensation.
MCO The sign of the compensation amount for the reference position of the
axis of mirror movement is:
0: Plus.
1: Minus.
MRO The optical path length compensation stop request signal is set to 1
when:
0: An overtravel occurs on the mirror block axis.
1: An overtravel occurs on the mirror block axis and the axis
specified in parameter No. 15700.

15703 MIRAXS
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range] 4 to 8
Selects which axis to be used as the U-axis along which the mirror
block moves.

- 170 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

15704 U-axis reference position compensation value

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] mm
[Valid data range] -32767 to 32767
[Standard setting value] 0
This value is specified as a distance from the reference position so that
the position of the mirror block axis (U-axis) is compensated to obtain
the optimum propagation distance

15705 Optical path length compensation coefficient

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] 1/64
[Valid data range] 64 to 32767
[Standard setting value] 128
The result of adjusting the total movement of the axes specified in
parameter No. 15700 with this coefficient is used as a move command
for the U-axis.

Alarm and message

No. Message Contents
4056 OPT. PATH NOT SET The mirror block position cannot be
corrected. The position of the U-axis
(mirror block move axis) cannot be
calculated from the current position of any
axis. Perform reference position return.

- 171 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

8.2 MACHINING CONDITION SETTING FUNCTION

Overview
Items necessary for laser machining are grouped, and the related data
items are numbered and registered in a data area. Specifying a data
number by a program causes the associated data to be read for laser
machining.
The data area has a storage capacity to hold the groups of data
necessary for machining one type of workpiece (such as material
quality and plate thickness). Simply specifying the data number can
set the necessary conditions for machining. Because the data area
assures high-speed access, the data in it can be readily changed by
manual operation during program execution. Moreover, the changed
data can be registered in the data area, enabling easy update of
machining conditions.

Data area configuration

(1) Data items are assembled in sets, the data item sets are grouped,
and the data item groups constitute a data area.
(2) The data area consists of a piercing data group, machining data
group, and auxiliary data group.
(3) The program can specify piercing and machining data groups
using address E followed by a set number.
Exxx ;
Machining data set number: 001 to 010
Piercing data set number: 101 to 103
(4) The auxiliary data group is specified among data items in the
machining data group. It cannot be specified directly using
address E.

- 172 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

Data group items

- Piercing data group
Piercing data items are provided for the high-speed piercing function
as described below.
To specify an ordinary piercing function, specify 0 for the step count.
In this case, piercing is performed based on the peak value, initial
frequency, initial duty cycle, and piercing time. See the chapter for the
high-speed piercing function for how high-speed piercing is
performed.

(1) The piercing data group consists of the items listed below.

Item Setting range Setting unit

Peak value 0 to 9999 W
Initial frequency 5 to 2000 Hz
Initial duty cycle 0 to 100 %
Frequency increment 0 to 2000 Hz
Duty cycle increment 0 to 99 %
Step time 0 to 9.999 s
Step count 0 to 99 Cycle
Piercing time 0001 to 999.999 s
Assist gas pressure 0 to 2.55 MPa
Assist gas type 1 to 7 Type
Assist gas setting time 0 to 9.9 s
Standard shift -9.999 to 9.999 mm

(2) Capacity
Three sets of the above items constitute a group.

(3) Calling method

If the program specifies a piercing data set number (101 to 103)
after address E, the data set corresponding to the specified
number is read as active data.
Exxx ;

Piercing data set number (101 to 103)

- Machining data group

(1) The machining data group consists of the items listed below.

Item Setting range Setting unit

Feedrate 0 to 99999 mm/min
Contouring peak value 0 to 9999 W
Contouring frequency 5 to 2000 Hz
Contouring duty cycle 0 to 100 %
Assist gas pressure 0 to 2.55 MPa
Assist gas type 1 to 7 Type
Assist gas setting time 0 to 9.9 s
Standard shift -9.999 to 9.999 mm
Beam diameter correction amount -9.999 to 9.999 mm
Edge machining selection 0/201 to 205 Auxiliary data number
Start-up selection 0/201 to 205 Auxiliary data number

- 173 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

(2) Capacity
Ten sets of the above items constitute a group.

(3) Calling method

If the program specifies a machining data set number (001 to
010) after address E, the data set corresponding to the specified
number is read as active data for control when a cutting feed
command is executed.
Exxx ;

Machining data set number (001 to 010)

- Auxiliary data group

An edge machining data group is provided as auxiliary data group.
The edge machining data is used for making sharp corners and in a
start-up function for a shift from piercing to figure cutting. The edge
machining data is called from the "edge machining selection" or
"start-up selection" item of the machining data group.
See the chapters for the edge machining function and start-up function
for detailed descriptions of edge machining and start-up operation,
respectively.

(1) The edge machining data group consists of the items listed
below.

Item Setting range Setting unit

Edge machining angle 0 to 180 Degrees
Piercing peak value 0 to 9999 W
Piercing peak frequency 5 to 2000 Hz
Piercing peak duty cycle 0 to 100 %
Piercing peak time 0 to 999.999 s
Piercing peak assist gas pressure 0 to 2.55 MPa
Piercing peak assist gas type 0 to 99 Type
Return distance 0 to 99.999 mm
Return speed 0 to 9999 mm/min
Return frequency 5 to 2000 Hz
Return duty cycle 0 to 100 %

(2) Capacity
Five sets (201 to 205) of the above items constitute a group.

(3) Calling method

The edge machining data is called indirectly. If the "edge
machining selection" or "start-up selection" item of the
machining data group is set with a number from 201 to 205, the
edge machining data is called simultaneously with the machining
data.

- 174 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

Data area display

(1) Soft key
Pressing the <OFFSET/SETTING> key on the MDI causes the
following soft keys to appear.
MACHINING PIERCING EDGE (OPRT)

(2) Data name display

The name of the currently displayed data appears at the top of the
screen.
Example
[MACHINING DATA], [PIERCING DATA]

(3) Active data number display

The currently active machining and piercing data set numbers
appear after the data name display.
Example
[MACHINING DATA] ACTIVE NO. = 5, PIERCING NO.
= 103
To clear the E number with a reset, set bit 6 of parameter No.
15004 to 1.

(4) Data display

- Machining data screen
- Piercing data screen
- Edge machining data screen

Changing data
(1) Data change function based on screen operation
When the corresponding screen is selected for display and the
[OPRT] soft key is pressed, it becomes possible to change data.
Place the cursor on the desired item and perform the appropriate
operations.
(a) When data at the number corresponding to the current
machining operation is corrected, the active data except for
correction is immediately corrected.
(b) For the correction data, the changed data becomes effective
when a block that involves buffer rewriting is executed.

(2) Data correction function based on an external signal

The data of a specified item in the machining data set
corresponding to the current machining operation can be
incremented and decremented by sending the correction data
from the PMC to the CNC.
(a) Specifying the R area
Three bytes of correction data are assigned to the R area of
the PMC. Specifying the R area start address in parameter
No. 15360 causes three bytes to be secured starting at the
start address.

- 175 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

(b) Correction data

The three bytes secured in the R area by a parameter are
assigned to "change item specification," "amount of
change," and "change scale factor," as described below. The
CNC reads the three bytes of data at 16 ms intervals for data
correction. The actual change data is the data of an item
specified by the "change item specification" (corresponding
to the machining data set number selected with the E code)
and incremented/decremented by the "amount of change"
multiplied by the "change scale factor."

Start address Change item specification

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1 to 255

Change item Data

Feedrate 1
Output 2
Frequency 3
Duty cycle 4
Tracing standard shift 5
Assist gas pressure 6

Start address + 1 Amount of change

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] ±127
[Unit of data] See the following table.

Change item Units

Feedrate 1mm/min
Output 1W
Frequency 1Hz
Duty cycle 1%
Tracing standard shift 0.001mm
Assist gas pressure 0.01MPa

Start address + 2 Change scale factor

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1 to 255

(c) Data transfer

The CNC reads the "amount of change" at 16 ms intervals. If the
read data is not 0, it also reads the "change item specification"
and "change scale factor." After reading all data, the CNC writes
0 in the "amount of change" to signify the end of data reception.
The PMC should check whether the "amount of change" is 0. If it
is 0, the PMC should set new data in the "change item
specification" and "change scale factor" (need not be set if the
previous data can be used), then rewrite the "amount of change."

- 176 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

Command data
(1) Items of command data
- Feedrate
- Peak value
- Frequency
- Duty cycle
- Assist gas pressure
- Assist gas type
- Standard shift
- Correction value
Override is applied to the feedrate, peak value, frequency, duty
cycle, and assist gas pressure.

(2) Command data display

A screen is provided to display command data.

Execution of data
(1) Piercing command
(a) When G24 is executed, a specified E code is written to the
piercing data E code buffer. The E code is read from the
buffer, and the data set corresponding to the number
specified in the E code is read from the data area and used
for piercing.
G24Exxx ;

Piercing data set number (101 to 103)

(b) The piercing data area number can be specified separately.

The specified E code is written to the piercing data E code
buffer. In this specification method, only the condition is
specified at the beginning of the program, and G24; is
issued later without specifying the E code.
Exxx ;
:
: Piercing data set number (101 to 103)
:
G24 ;

(2) Reading machining data

(a) When a cutting command is executed, the specified E code
is written to the machining E code buffer. The E code is
read from the buffer, and the data set corresponding to the
number specified in the E code is read from the data area
and used for machining.

Cutting feed command G01 + Exxx ;

G02 Machining data set number
G03 (1 to 10)
G12

- 177 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

(b) The machining data set number can be specified separately.

The specified E code is written to the machining E code
buffer. In this specification method, only the condition is
specified at the beginning of the program, and a cutting feed
command is issued later without specifying the E code.
Exxx ;
:
: Machining data set number (1 to 10)
:
:
G01X_Y_;

(3) Switching the assist gas type

G32 is used to turn on and off the assist gas and switch the gas
type between piercing assist gas and machining assist gas. The
shutter is opened and closed simultaneously when the assist gas
is turned on and off. However, shutter open/close control can be
disabled by setting a parameter.
G32Lx ;

0 = stop the assist gas.

1 = select the machining assist gas.
2 = select the piercing assist gas.

(4) Sample program

G92 X- Y- Z-; : Select the coordinate system.
E001; : Specify the machining data set number in
the data area.
E101; : Specify the piercing data set number in the
data area.
M200;[macro call]
G32L2; : Activate the assist gas according to the E101
data and open the shutter.
G24; : Perform piercing according to the E101 data.
G32 L1; : Switch the assist gas type according to the
E001 data.
G01 X-Y-; : Perform start-up machining if an auxiliary
data set number is specified in the "start-up
selection" item.
X-Y-; : Execute cutting according to the E001 data.
:
:
:
M201;[macro call]
G32L0; : Stop the assist gas and close the shutter.
M30; : End the program.

- 178 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

Data expansion
The data area for the machining condition setting function can be
accessed at high speed, but its capacity is not big. To handle many
types of workpiece materials, it is necessary to prepare a separate data
file and transfer the necessary data from the data file to the data area.
By enhancing the battery-powered memory that can be controlled by
the PMC and the CNC-PMC window function, application software
for using the battery-powered memory as a data file was developed
using the PMC C language.

- Reading comments
An M code is available for transferring comments. The M code can be
specified in parameter No. 15350. The M code can pass a comment
consisting of up to 24 alphanumeric characters to the PMC using the
window function. The comment can be used to specify the material of
a workpiece.
Mxxx (*************) ;
Up to 24 alphanumeric characters, including a
decimal point and sign

In this M code, xxx is a value specified in parameter No. 15350.

- Transferring data
(1) Data transfer using the PMC-CNC window function
The PMC-CNC window function enables data transfer between
the CNC data area and the battery-powered memory. In this
method, all machining conditions are previously registered in the
battery-powered memory, and the necessary data is specified
using the M code for comment reading and transferred to the data
area, in order to assure high-speed access during machining.

(2) Data transfer between the data area and macro executer
System variables have been assigned to data items so that data
can be read from and written to the data area using
conversational macros and execution macros.

(a) Piercing data

Item 101 102 103
Peak value #6500 #6515 #6530
Initial frequency #6501 #6516 #6531
Initial duty cycle #6502 #6517 #6532
Frequency increment #6503 #6518 #6533
Duty cycle increment #6504 #6519 #6534
Step time #6505 #6520 #6535
Step count #6506 #6521 #6536
Piercing time #6507 #6522 #6537
Assist gas pressure #6508 #6523 #6538
Assist gas type #6509 #6524 #6539
Assist gas setting time #6510 #6525 #6540
Standard shift #6511 #6526 #6541

- 179 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

(b) Machining data

Item 001 002 003 004 005
Feedrate #6300 #6315 #6330 #6345 #6360
Contouring peak value #6301 #6316 #6331 #6346 #6361
Contouring frequency #6302 #6317 #6332 #6347 #6362
Contouring duty cycle #6303 #6318 #6333 #6348 #6363
Assist gas pressure #6304 #6319 #6334 #6349 #6364
Assist gas type #6305 #6320 #6335 #6350 #6365
Assist gas setting time #6306 #6321 #6336 #6351 #6366
Standard shift #6307 #6322 #6337 #6352 #6367
Cutter compensation amount #6308 #6323 #6338 #6353 #6368
Edge machining selection #6309 #6324 #6339 #6354 #6369
Start-up selection #6310 #6325 #6340 #6355 #6370

Item 006 007 008 009 010

Feedrate #6375 #6390 #6405 #6420 #6435
Contouring peak value #6376 #6391 #6406 #6421 #6436
Contouring frequency #6377 #6392 #6407 #6422 #6437
Contouring duty cycle #6378 #6393 #6408 #6423 #6438
Assist gas pressure #6379 #6394 #6409 #6424 #6439
Assist gas type #6380 #6395 #6410 #6425 #6440
Assist gas setting time #6381 #6396 #6411 #6426 #6441
Standard shift #6382 #6397 #6412 #6427 #6442
Cutter compensation amount #6383 #6398 #6413 #6428 #6443
Edge machining selection #6384 #6399 #6414 #6429 #6444
Start-up selection #6385 #6400 #6415 #6430 #6445

(c) Edge data

Item 201 202 203 204 205
Edge operation angle #6700 #6715 #6730 #6745 #6760
Piercing peak value #6701 #6716 #6731 #6746 #6761
Piercing frequency #6702 #6717 #6732 #6747 #6762
Piercing duty cycle #6703 #6718 #6733 #6748 #6763
Piercing time #6704 #6719 #6734 #6749 #6764
Piercing assist gas pressure #6705 #6720 #6735 #6750 #6765
Piercing assist gas type #6706 #6721 #6736 #6751 #6766
Return distance #6707 #6722 #6737 #6752 #6767
Return speed #6708 #6723 #6738 #6753 #6768
Return frequency #6709 #6724 #6739 #6754 #6769
Return duty cycle #6710 #6725 #6740 #6755 #6770

(d) Active E code

Item -
Piercing data set number #6030
Machining data set number #6031

- Reading command data

Command data can be read during execution.
(1) Reading command data from the PMC
Command data can be read from the PMC through the
CNC-PMC window.

- 180 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

(2) System variable for the command data

System variables have been assigned so that the macro executer
can access command data.
Item Variable
Feedrate #6040
Peak value #6041
Frequency #6042
Duty cycle #6043
Assist gas pressure #6044
Assist gas type #6045
Standard shift #6046
Correction amount #6047
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15004 ECH
[Data type] Bit
ECH With a reset, the active E number is:
0: Not erased.
1: Erased.

15350 Comment read M code

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range] 1 to 999
Specify the code number of the auxiliary function for reading
comments.

15360 Correction data R area start address

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range] 1 to 997
Specifying the R area address in the PMC enables correction data to
be assigned, starting at this address. If the correction function is not
used, this parameter should be reset to 0.

CAUTION
Function codes 183 and 184 are supported by the
FS16-LA and FS16-LB, but not by the FS16i-LB.
(When nonvolatile memory expansion is used, C
for the PMC is required. Use C to access
battery-powered memory.)

- 181 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

8.3 PIERCING FUNCTION

Overview
The output power for piercing is changed in steps so that the optimum
output power can be selected according to the requirement of a
particular application. Applying the optimum power enables stable
piercing with the shortest possible time.

Control method
(1) Output control
The average output is controlled by fixing the output peak value
and increasing the pulse frequency and duty cycle in every unit
time.

Setting
Piercing is performed by setting the following items.
When the machining condition setting function is used, the following
items can be registered in advance for three sets.
1 Peak value
2 Initial frequency
3 Initial duty cycle
4 Frequency increment
5 Duty cycle increment
6 Step time
7 Step count
8 Piercing time
9 Assist gas pressure
10 Assist gas type
11 Assist gas setting time
12 Standard shift

- 182 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

Operation
Piercing is performed as follows:
(1) The assist gas selection signals (AG1 to AG3) are asserted to
output an analog signal indicating the assist gas pressure.
(2) When the assist gas setting time elapses, an output command is
executed according to the specified peak value, initial frequency,
and initial duty cycle.
(3) When the specified step time elapses, the frequency and duty
cycle are increased by the specified increment.
(4) After the frequency and duty cycle are repeatedly varied as many
times as the step count at intervals of the specified step time, the
output is kept unchanged.
(5) When the piercing time elapses, the piercing operation is
terminated.

Command
(1) When the machining condition setting function is used
(a) Selecting the piercing data
Issuing a command with the E address followed by a
piercing data set number causes the data corresponding to
the specified number to be selected.
E101 ;
(b) Command
After selecting the piercing data, issuing G24; starts
piercing.
E101 ;
G24 ;
(c) Selecting the assist gas
To perform piercing with the assist gas specified as the
piercing data, use the following commands.
E101 ; Specify a piercing data set.
E5 ; Specify a machining data set.
G32L2 ; Select the assist gas data
(L1 = machining data group; L2 =
piercing data group)
G24 ; Piercing command

(2) Command using the G code

G24S - P - Q - I - J - K - H - R - ;
where
S : Output peak value
P : Initial pulse frequency
Q : Initial pulse duty cycle
I : Frequency increment
J : Duty cycle increment
K : Step time
H : Step count
R : Piercing end time

- 183 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Function for changing piercing time from the outside

When this function is used for piercing, the following operation takes
place.
(1) If "prolongation" is operated on during piercing, the final
continuation time is extended.
(2) If "curtailment" is operated on during piercing, piercing ends at
the rising edge of the signal.
(3) If either "prolongation" or "curtailment" is operated on, bit 1 of
parameter No. 15003 can be used to specify whether to update
the piercing time set in a parameter. When the piercing condition,
which is set in the data area for the machining condition setting
function, is selected, however, the piercing time set in the
parameter cannot be updated.

Override
No override is applied to the piercing data (such as output peak value,
frequency, or duty cycle).

- 184 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

8.4 EDGE MACHINE FUNCTION

Overview
The edge machine function consists of edge detection, deceleration
and stop control, piercing, and feedrate and power control for a shift
from piercing to cutting. This function is intended to produce a sharp
edge.

Conditions for use

The following conditions apply to use of this function.
(1) The machining condition setting function (option) is required.
(2) The automatic corner override function cannot be used with this
function.
(3) Automatic corner deceleration cannot be used with this function.

Edge decision
(1) Angle
Corner θ made by two cutting feed blocks (A and B) is calculated
in G64 mode (cutting feed).
(a) Straight line to straight line

(b) Straight line to arc

(c) Arc to arc

(2) Edge
If a calculated angle is smaller than or equal to the specified
value, it is assumed to be a corner, and the nozzle decelerates and
stops at the end point of block A for feedrate and power control.

- 185 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Operation
The operation shown below occurs during a shift from block A to
block B.

Data for block A

Fa : Feedrate in block A
Sa : Output peak value in block A
Pa : Pulse frequency in block A
Qa : Pulse duty cycle in block A
Edge machining data
Se : Piercing output peak value
Pe : Piercing pulse frequency
Qe : Piercing pulse duty cycle
Te : Piercing time
Lr : Return distance
Fr : Return speed
Pr : Return frequency
Qr : Return duty cycle
Data for block B
Fb : Feedrate in block B
Sb : Output peak value in block B
Pb : Pulse frequency in block B
Qb : Pulse duty cycle in block B

(1) The nozzle decelerates and stops at the end point of block A.
(2) The output power is maintained until the nozzle decelerates and
stops.
(3) When piercing ends, movement specified in block B begins.
(4) Before shifting to block B, the feedrate is set to the return speed,
the output is set to the peak value for cutting specified in block B,
the return frequency, and duty cycle. The operation of block B
starts under these conditions and continues until the return
distance is moved through.
(5) After the nozzle moves through the return distance, the
machining conditions of block B are selected, and machining
continues under these conditions.
- 186 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

Setting the data

The data area for the machining condition setting function can hold
five sets of the data listed below.

Item Setting range Setting unit

Edge operation angle 0 to 180 Degrees
Piercing peak value 0 to 7000 W
Piercing pulse frequency 5 to 2000 Hz
Piercing pulse duty cycle 0 to 100 %
Piercing time 0 to 999.999 s
Piercing assist gas pressure 0 to 2.55 MPa
Piercing assist gas type 0 to 7 -
Return distance 1 to 99.999 mm
Return speed 1 to 9999 mm/min
Return frequency 5 to 2000 Hz
Return duty cycle 0 to 100 %
The return distance must not exceed the length of one block.
Return peak value Sb' can be specified in parameter No. 15059.
This is intended to use the output peak value Sb' that is different
from the peak value Sb of block B during movement through the
distance Lr. If this parameter is 0, machining is performed with
Sb' = Sb.

Selecting the edge function

The edge machine function is enabled by setting an edge data number
from 201 to 205 in the "edge selection" item in the machining data
group. To disable this function, reset the "edge selection" item to 0.

Edge machining command

If a program specifies a machining data set number using the E
address, when the program is executed, the "edge selection" item in
the specified machining data is referenced, and the edge data set
number is read for edge machining.

Cutter compensation
If a very small block is created for cutter compensation, angle decision
is made on the angle made by the current block and the very small
block, resulting in the angle differing from the one specified by the
program. If cutter compensation is applied during edge machining, a
very small block is created at the edge, causing the following
operations.
1 Piercing is performed before the very small block created for
cutter compensation.
2 Execution of the very small block begins with the return data,
and operation continues to the next block. After the return
distance is moved through, the programmed machining
conditions are applied.
To execute edge machining with the path on the machining
program in cutter compensation mode, set bit 3 of parameter No.
15007 to 1.

- 187 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Assist gas
If assist gas switching is to occur during piercing for edge creation, bit
4 of parameter No. 15004 can be used to specify whether to output the
laser beam during assist gas setting time.

If assist gas switching is not to occur, specify 0 at assist gas selection

or select the same assist gas data as for machining.

If, in the process of assist gas switching at the start of piercing for
edge machining, at the start of the subsequent return distance cutting,
and at the start of start-up machining, the specified assist gas setting
time is to be ignored when the gas type and gas pressure defined with
the specified edge selection number and start-up selection number are
the same as those for cutting, set bit 3 of parameter No. 15011 to 1.

If machining is to be performed with the assist gas output conditions

defined with the specified edge selection number and start-up
selection number instead of the assist gas output conditions during
return distance cutting in edge machining and start-up machining, set
bit 0 of parameter No. 15011 to 1.

If bit 0 of parameter No.15011 and bit 3 of parameter No. 15011 are

set at the same time, the setting of parameter No. 15011 takes effect.
The setting of bit 3 is ignored.

Override
Override is applied to the following items.
1 Return speed
2 Return peak value
3 Return frequency
4 Return duty cycle

Tracing control
During edge machining tracing control, a value specified for
machining is made effective as the standard shift.

Single-block stop and dry run

The edge machine function does not work for single-block stop and
dry run.

Other settings for machining

If material remains to be cut near a corner in edge machining, set bit 2
of parameter No. 15007 to 1. The situation may improve. If you want
to perform edge machining even in the exact stop mode, set bit 4 of
parameter No. 15007 to 1.
To make the edge machine function and the arc-radius-based feedrate
clamp function usable at the same time, set bit 7 of parameter No.
15010 to 1.

- 188 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15004 EDG
[Data type] Bit
EDG 0: Specifies to turn off the laser beam at assist gas switching for
edge machining.
1: Specifies not to turn off the laser beam at assist gas switching for
edge machining.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15007 XSC ECK ESE
[Data type] Bit
ESE If piercing is to be executed in edge machining, it is:
0: Executed upon the completion of distribution.
1: Executed after a smoothing error check is performed upon the
completion of distribution.
ECK In edge machining, the angle is judged with:
0: The actual machining path.
1: The path in the machining program.
XSC In exact stop mode, the edge machine function is:
0: Not executed.
1: Executed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15010 OVE
[Data type] Bit
OVE Edge machining and feedrate clamp by arc radius:
0: Cannot be used at the same time.
1: Can be used at the same time.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15011 CSC LVE EDS
[Data type] Bit
EDS The cutting conditions to be assumed during the execution of the
return distance in edge machining and start-up machining are:
0: The same as usual.
1: Not the same as usual. For the laser power, assist gas type, and
assist gas pressure, the piercing operation conditions for edge
machining are used.

NOTE
When this setting is enabled, this setting has higher
priority than bit 3 of No. 15011.

- 189 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

LVE At the start of edge machining and at the start of return distance
cutting that follows, assist gas switching is performed:
0: According to the conventional specification.
1: By ignoring settling time if the gas type and gas pressure remain
unchanged.

NOTE
This setting is disabled when bit 0 of No. 15011 is
set to 1.

CSC If all of SPQF are specified in the first G01, G02, and G03 blocks
after G24 in the start-up machining mode:
0: Start-up machining is performed as conventionally done,
regardless of the specification of SPQF.
1: Start-up machining is canceled, and cutting is performed
according to the values of SPQF specified.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15012 EXS CVA
[Data type] Bit
CVA When the edge machine function is used, angle determination is:
0: Based on bit 3 of parameter No. 15007.
1: Made according to the program path, regardless of the setting of
bit 3 of parameter No. 15007.
EXS When the edge machine function is executed, switching to the
piercing operation execution condition occurs:
0: Upon completion of distribution (when bit 2 of parameter No.
15007 = 0) or upon completion of acceleration/deceleration
(when bit 2 of parameter No. 15007 = 1)
1: After an in-position check is made for all axes.

15059 Return peak value

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] W
[Valid data range] 0 to 7000
When the nozzle is leaving a corner during edge machining, it keeps
running with the return speed, return frequency, and return duty cycle
until it moves through the specified return distance, but it continues to
use the programmed output peak value. If a value has been specified
as a return peak value, it is used instead of the programmed value.

- 190 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

8.5 START-UP FUNCTION

Overview
When a shift occurs from the piercing command G24 to a cutting
command block, stable machining is assured by performing the same
operation as the start-up function (for a corner subjected to edge
machining) through the specified return distance.

Conditions for use

The following conditions apply to use of this function.
(1) The machining condition setting function (option) and edge
machining function are required.
(2) The automatic corner override function cannot be used with this
function.
(3) Automatic corner deceleration cannot be used with this function.

Operation
When the piercing command G24 ends, the next block (cutting
command) is executed. The return data for edge cutting becomes
effective for the start-up of this block.

Lr : Return distance
Fr : Return speed
Pr : Return frequency
Qr : Return duty cycle
Fb : Cutting command feedrate
Sb : Cutting command output peak value
Pb : Cutting command pulse frequency
Qb : Cutting command pulse duty cycle

1 When the piercing command G24 ends, movement specified by

the cutting command begins.

- 191 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

2 The cutting operation is performed with the cutting output peak

value specified, the return speed being used as the feedrate, and
the return frequency and duty cycle being as those of the output
power. These conditions continue until the return distance is
moved through.
3 After the return distance is moved through, the machining
conditions of the cutting command are selected, and machining
continues under these conditions.

Setting the data

The edge machining data for the machining condition setting function
is used for start-up machining. The data area for the edge machining
condition setting function can hold five sets of the data items listed
below. The data items that have no value in this table are ignored in
the start-up function.

Item Setting range Setting unit

Edge operation angle - -
Piercing peak value - -
Piercing pulse frequency - -
Piercing pulse duty cycle - -
Piercing time - -
Piercing assist gas pressure - -
Piercing assist gas type - -
Return distance 1 to 99.999 mm
Return speed 1 to 9999 mm/min
Return frequency 5 to 2000 Hz
Return duty cycle 0 to 100 %
The return distance cannot exceed the length of a single block.
Return peak value Sb' can be specified in parameter No. 15059. This
is intended to use the output peak value Sb' that is different from the
peak value Sb of block B during movement through the distance Lr. If
this parameter is 0, machining is performed with Sb' = Sb.

Selecting the start-up function

The stat-up function is enabled by setting an edge data number from
201 to 205 in the "start-up selection" item in the machining data group.
To disable this function, reset the "start-up selection" item to 0.

Start-up command
If a program specifies a machining data set number using the E
address, when the program is executed, the "start-up selection" item in
the specified machining data is referenced, and the edge data set
number is read for execution of the start-up function.

Override
Override is applied to the following item.
1 Return speed
2 Return peak value
3 Return frequency
4 Return duty cycle

- 192 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

Tracing control
The standard shift used for piercing specified by the E code continues
to be effective during execution of the start-up function. When a
start-up is completed (the return distance has been moved through),
the standard shift for cutting is selected.
If piercing is not based on the E code, the currently effective standard
shift continues to be effective for the start-up function.

Single-block stop and dry run

The start-up function does not work for single-block stop and dry run.

Sample program
The following sample program uses the start-up function.
1 The nozzle is positioned at a point (X50, Y50). At this point, the
G32 assist gas and G24 piercing commands are executed in the
stated sequence.
2 When piercing is completed, the cutting assist gas is selected,
and machining begins.
3 A start-up operation is performed in interval A (specified return
distance), where machining is carried out using the feedrate,
output peak value, frequency, and duty cycle specified for a
return operation.
4 When the start-up operation ends, machining continues using the
programmed feedrate, output peak value, frequency, and duty
cycle.

Parameter
For information on the specifiable parameters, see the section on edge
machining.

- 193 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

8.6 RETRY PROCESSING FUNCTION

Overview
A burning condition may occur during laser machining, disabling
further machining. In such a case, a normal operation may be able to
be resumed by returning the nozzle to a point where it was before the
burning condition occurred and by retrying processing. This is done
using the retry processing function. This function operates as follows:
When a machining failure is detected, the nozzle moves back along
the machining path to a specified point with the beam turned off.
When it gets to the specified point, it enters a machining state and
goes forward along the same machining path toward the point where it
started going backward (retrace start point). When it gets to the retrace
start point, the nozzle resumes machining as directed by the program.
This function cannot be used with the three-dimensional machining
function. Because the retry processing function is based on the
FS16-M retrace function, it is necessary to specify the retrace function
and conform to the retrace function specification.

Operation
The retry processing function operates as follows:

[1] Sets the retry processing mode signal (RVSLSR) to "1", and
resets the automatic operation stop signal (*SP) to "0" according
to the machining failure detection signal during program
execution. After that, specifies as follows:
- Movement = discontinued
- Beam = off
- Assist gas = off
- Tracing control = off (*1)

- 194 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

[2] Sets the retrace signal (RVS) to "1" to start automatic operation,
stores the current position of the nozzle as the retrace start point,
then retraces in the positive Z-axis direction through the distance
specified in parameter No. 15650, under the following
conditions.
- Beam = off
- Assist gas = off
- Tracing control = off
[3] When the retract operation is completed, retraces through the
distance specified in parameter No. 15651 and stops (*2). When
the retrace completed signal (RVSARV) becomes "1", resets the
retrace signal (RVS) to "0" to trigger a cycle start:
- If the program directs tracing control = on at the end of
retracing, the nozzle approaches the workpiece.
- If the program directs tracing control = off at the end of
retracing, Z-axis retracting is canceled in fast forward mode
(drops through the distance specified in parameter No.
15650), the nozzle gets close to the workpiece.
[4] Creates the assist gas command (G32) automatically and
executes it.
[5] Creates a move command with the retrace start point as the goal,
turns on the laser beam, and resumes forward trace. When the
nozzle gets to the retrace start point, calls the block executed in
step 1 and restarts program execution.
[6] After restarting, checks whether the retry completion distance
(specified in parameter No. 15652) is exceeded.
[7] Continues machining if no machining failure occurs after moving
through the retry completion distance.
[8] Repeats steps [2] to [4] if a machining failure occurs before
moving through the retry completion distance.
[9] If a retry is repeated a specified number of times (specified in
parameter No. 15653) unsuccessfully, assumes that retry
processing is impossible, and stops retry and triggers skip
processing.
- Z-axis retract
- Beam = off
- Assist gas = off
- Tracing control = off (*1)
[10] Start positioning at the end of the block mentioned in step [1]. A
single-block stop occurs at the end of the block.
[11] If the skip completion signal (RVSSKE) or retrace completion
signal (RVSARV) is "1", resets the retrace signal (RVS) to "0" to
trigger a cycle start.
- If tracing control is on in the block mentioned in step [1],
the nozzle approaches the workpiece.
- If tracing control is off in the block mentioned in step [1],
Z-axis retracting is canceled in fast forward mode, the
nozzle gets close to the workpiece.

- 195 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

[12] Executes the assist gas command (G32), then the piercing
command (G24). (*3)
This piercing operation is performed under the most recently
used conditions. (*5)
When piercing is completed, executes the assist gas command
(G32) again to switch to the machining assist gas:
- Assist gas = on
- Beam = on
[13] Executes the next block.
Notes
(1) When using the external tracing on/off function, reset the tracing
start signal (TCST) to "0" using a ladder program, and check that
the tracing motion signal (TRCL) is "0".
(2) In addition to the distance, the following conditions terminate
retracing.
(a) The newly read command is G00.
(b) The newly read command is a Z-axis move command.
(c) A skipped block is encountered.
(d) The G92 command is encountered.
(3) A skip always causes the nozzle to get close to the workpiece and
triggers piercing. Even if the skipped position is the end point of
machining, piercing takes place.
(4) If the following conditions are encountered, it is assumed that
machining cannot be continued, and the machining continuation
impossible signal (RVSERR) is output to terminate machining.
(a) During G24 execution, the number of detected machining
failures exceeds the retry count. (During piercing, detection
of machining failures must be disabled.)
(b) During G32 execution, a machining failure is detected,
resulting in a shift to a skip.
(5) The piercing command related to a skip operation can be
executed with values specified in dedicated parameters
(parameter Nos. 15669 to 15682).
(6) This function can be used only for X-Y facing. It cannot be used
with the three-dimensional machining function and other
functions.

PMC processing
To use the retrace function complying with the FS16-L specification,
it is necessary to process signals in the PMC. The solid-line arrow
( ) indicates the processing on the PMC side, and the broken-line
arrow ( ) indicates the processing internal to the CNC.

- 196 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

Ordinary retracing
The following timing chart applies to ordinary retracing.

- 197 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Skip processing
The following timing chart applies to skip processing.

- 198 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

Machining continuation impossible

If a machining continuation impossible signal is output, the PMC
should perform processing to terminate machining.

Advanced preview control restart

When the retry processing function is used, advanced preview control
is performed as follows:
When [1] and [2] are being executed with advanced preview control
mode turned on, if a machining failure is detected at [2] in the course
of operation by the N2 block, a retrace occurs. At this point, advanced
preview control mode is turned off automatically. [3] to [7] are
executed with advanced preview control mode turned off. A
single-block stop occurs at the end of the N2 block, and advanced
preview control mode is turned on. After the advanced preview
control restart signal (RVSG08) is set to "1", triggering a cycle start
restarts machining at <8> with advanced preview control mode turned
on.

- 199 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Signal
- Retry processing mode selection signal
RVSLSR<G226#7>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Enables the retry processing function.
[Operation] If the retry processing mode selection signal is "0", the retrace
function is enabled. If the signal is "1", the retry processing function is
enabled. If only the retry processing function is being used, this signal
must always be "1". If it is necessary to switch this signal, switch it
before setting the retrace signal (RVS) to "1". Once retrace has began,
do not switch the signal until the retrace start point is reached.

- 200 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

- Retrace signal
RVS<G007#0>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Starts retracing.
[Operation] If both retry processing mode selection signal (RVSLSR) and
automatic operation stop signal (SPL) are "1", setting the retrace
signal (RVS) to "1" retracts the Z-axis and triggers a retrace. When
retracing ends and the automatic operation stop signal (SPL) becomes
"0" resetting the retrace signal (RVS) to "0" to trigger a cycle start
causes forward tracing.

- Retrace-in-progress signal
RVSL<F082#2>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Informs the PMC that the nozzle is moving backward along the
machining path.
[Output condition] This signal becomes “1” when:
- The retrace signal (RVS) becomes "1" to begin retracing.
This signal becomes “0” when:
- The retrace signal (RVS) becomes "0" to begin forward tracing
(including restarted forward tracing).
- The nozzle is at a stop because there is no block to retrace.

During retracing, the M, T, and second auxiliary functions are

executed in the same way as during a forward trace. If this is
undesirable, use the retrace-in-progress signal (RVSL) to direct the
PMC to perform its own processing.

If the M, T, or second auxiliary function is in the same block as a

move command, the output position of the code and strobe signals
differs between forward tracing and retracing. So, use this signal and
the distribution end signal (DEN), as required, to direct the PMC to
perform its own processing.

- 201 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

- Retrace completion signal

RVSARV<F225#0>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Informs the PMC that a retrace is completed.
[Output condition] This signal becomes “1” when:
- The specified distance has been retraced.
- The nozzle is positioned at the end of the block during a skip.
This signal becomes “0” when:
- The retrace signal (RVS) is reset to "0" to trigger a cycle start
after the retrace completion signal (RVSARV) becomes "1".

- Skip completion signal

RVSSKE<F225#2>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Informs the PMC that a skip is completed.
[Output condition] This signal becomes “1” when:
- A skip is completed.
This signal becomes “0” when:
- The retrace signal (RVS) is reset to "0" to trigger a cycle start
after the skip completion signal (RVSSKE) becomes "1".
When a skip is completed, the skip completion signal (RVSSKE) and
retrace completion signal (RVSARV) become "1" simultaneously.
When the retrace signal (RVS) is reset to "0" to trigger a cycle start,
they become "0" simultaneously.

- Machining continuation impossible signal

RVSERR<F225#3>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Informs the PMC that machining cannot be continued.
[Output condition] This signal becomes “1” when:
- A machining failure is detected more times than the specified
retry count during execution of the G24 command.
- A machining failure is detected during execution of the G32
command, and a skip is started.
This signal becomes “0” when:
- The retrace signal (RVS) is reset to "0" to trigger a cycle start.
- The reset button is pressed.

When the machining continuation impossible signal (RVSERR) signal

is received, switch off the system power using a ladder program to
perform the following procedure.
(Example)
- Cause a reference position return in reference position
return mode.
- Set the oscillator RUN to off to stop the oscillator.
- Shut off the system power.

The machining continuation impossible signal (RVSERR) is cleared

by a reset signal. But do not retry processing even after it is cleared.

- 202 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

- Advanced preview control restart signal

RVSG08<F225#4>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Informs the PMC that advanced preview control is turned on
automatically.
[Output condition] If a machining failure occurs during advanced preview control mode,
this mode is turned off automatically, and the retry processing
function is executed. To select advanced preview control mode again,
the CNC makes an automatic single-block stop at the end of a block
where the machining failure occurred, turns on advanced preview
control automatically, and sets the advanced preview control restart
signal (RVSG08) to "1". After making sure that the advanced preview
control restart signal (RVSG08) signal becomes "1", the PMC should
trigger a cycle start. Advanced preview control will be turned on to
retry processing.

- Advanced preview control-in-progress signal

G08MD<F066#0>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Informs the PMC that advanced preview control is in progress.
[Output condition] This signal becomes “1” when:
- Advanced preview control mode has been selected.
This signal becomes “0” when:
- Advanced preview control mode has not been selected.

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G007 RVS

G226 RVSLSR

F066 G08MD

F082 RVSL

F225 RVSG08 RVSERR RVSSKE RVSARV

Parameter
15650 Z-axis retract amount
[Data type] 2-word
[Unit of data] Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
Specify the distance through which the Z-axis retracts, before starting
retracing or skipping. If this parameter is 0, the Z-axis will not retract.

- 203 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

15651 Retrace distance

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] mm/inch
[Valid data range] 0 to 8000
Specify the distance at which a retrace is to end. This distance begins
at the retrace start point and ends at the point where a retrace is to end.
If the distance is 0, a retrace will not be done. Instead, a skip will
occur.

15652 Retry completion distance

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] mm/inch
[Valid data range] 0 to 8000
After the retry processing point is passed during a retried forward
trace, the moved distance is monitored. If a machining failure does not
occur until the distance specified in this parameter is moved through,
it is assumed that machining has been retried normally. If a machining
failure is detected before this distance is moved through, a retrace
occurs again, and retries are counted.

15653 Retry count

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
When the retry processing point is passed during a retried forward
trace, if a machining failure is detected before the retry completion
distance (specified in parameter No. 15652) is passed through, the
Z-axis is retracted, and retries are counted. If the number of retries
performed exceeds the retry count specified in parameter No. 15653, a
retrace will not be done; instead this block is skipped. If the retry
count is 0, a skip occurs immediately without performing a retrace.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15669 N2S
[Data type] Bit
N2S 0: Specifies that piercing during a retried forward retrace be
performed as directed by the program.
1: Specifies that piercing during a retried forward retrace be
performed as specified in parameter Nos. 15670 to 15682.

15670 Piercing power

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] W
[Valid data range] 0 to 7000
Specify how much high-speed piercing power is to be used during a
skip.

- 204 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

15671 High-speed piercing initial frequency

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Hz
[Valid data range] 5 to 2000
Specify the initial frequency for high-speed piercing to be used during
a skip.

15672 High-speed piercing frequency increment

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Hz
[Valid data range] 0 to 2000
Specify the frequency increment for high-speed piercing to be used
during a skip.

15673 High-speed piercing initial duty cycle

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
Specify the initial duty cycle for high-speed piercing to be used during
a skip.

15674 High-speed piercing duty cycle increment

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
Specify the duty cycle increment for high-speed piercing to be used
during a skip.

15675 High-speed piercing step time

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Specify the step time for high-speed piercing to be used during a skip.

15676 High-speed piercing step count

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Specify the step count for high-speed piercing to be used during a
skip.

15677 High-speed piercing end time

[Data type] 2-word
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
Specify the end time for high-speed piercing to be used during a skip.

- 205 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

15678 Standard shift

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] 0.001mm
[Valid data range] Parameters Nos. 15531 to 15532
Specify the standard shift for piercing to be used during a skip. This
value determines the reference distance from the tip of the quill to the
workpiece for Z-axis tracing control.

15679 Assist gas selection

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range] 0 to 7
Select the type of assist gas to be used during a skip.

15680 Flow pattern selection

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3
Select the pattern of assist gas flow to be used during a skip.

15681 Assist gas pressure setting time for piercing

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] 10msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Specify the assist gas pressure setting time for piercing to be used
during a skip.

15682 Assist gas pressure for piercing

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] 0.01MPa
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
Specify the assist gas pressure for piercing to be used during a skip.

- 206 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

8.7 LASER POWER CONTROL

Overview
When a difference is detected between the actual speed and the
programmed speed in a corner portion, for example, the laser power
control function adjusts the peak power, pulse frequency, and pulse
duty ratio to achieve uniform machining.
When the laser power control mode, described later, is selected by a G
code or external signal, the power, pulse frequency, and pulse duty
ratio are controlled to maintain the following relation:
F
M = Mo ＋（Mc - Mo）
Fc

Peak power
Pulse frequency
Pulse duty ratio

Mo : Power, frequency, or duty ratio when feedrate F is 0,

specified in a parameter
Mmin : Minimum power, frequency, or duty ratio, specified in
a parameter
Mc : Power, frequency, or duty ratio in laser power control
mode, specified by a program
Fc : Feedrate in laser power control mode, specified by a
program

Fig. 8.7

- 207 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Power control mode

Laser power control mode can be selected using a G code or an
external signal. When the system enters power control mode, the
power control mode in progress signal (F224#1) is output.
G codes
G63P1; Laser power control mode
G63P0; Laser power control mode cancel
External signal
G224#1 Power control mode signal

Enabling or disabling the function

The power control function can be enabled or disabled using the laser
setting screen or a parameter.
Using the laser setting screen
To enable the power control function, set 1 in the power control field
on the laser setting screen.
Using a parameter
To enable the power control function, set bit 0 of parameter No. 15000
to 1.

Selecting a control item

The peak power, pulse frequency, and pulse duty ratio can be
selectively controlled as specified in parameter No. 15096. One or
more items can be selected.

Axis of power control

The power control function calculates the elements controlling the
laser output (peak power, pulse frequency, and pulse duty ratio) from
the nozzle feedrate. The machine axes related to the operation of the
nozzle should be specified in parameter No. 15089 so that the feedrate
can be obtained accurately. If nothing is specified in this parameter,
the first and second axes are assumed.
Avoid specifying the synchronization axis of simple synchronous
control. The synchronization axis is related to the movement of the
nozzle, but this axis and the master axis form a pair, which should be
considered as a single axis.

Dead zone for variations in feedrate

The feedrate fluctuates slightly even in the steady state. The
fluctuations result in variations in the values calculated from the
feedrate. These variations can be avoided by setting an allowable
feedrate variation (dead zone) in a parameter.
If the difference between the actual feedrate and programmed feedrate
in a current block does not exceed the value specified in the parameter,
the movement is considered as being made at the programmed
feedrate, causing no change in the values.

- 208 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

Delay compensation of the mechanical system

The power control function changes the values of the laser output in
proportion to the programmed speed. The mechanical system (servo
system) lags behind the laser output, and the operation of the
mechanical system does not match the changes in the laser output in
practice. To compensate for the delay, a first-order delay filter is
applied to the feedrate data of the mechanical system. The filter delays
the changes in the laser output. The setting of the first-order delay
filter is made in a parameter.

Use with the cutting condition setting function (E code command)

If an E code is specified to change cutting conditions in power control
mode, the data corresponding to MC and FC in Fig. 8.7 is replaced
with the cutting condition data specified with the E code to continue
processing.

Use with the edge machine function, start-up machining function, and step
control function
If step control (E301 to E305) is specified, the system cannot enter
power control mode. If skip control is specified in power control mode,
power control mode is automatically canceled. If edge
machining/start-up machining (E205 to E205) is specified, the
operation differs depending on bit 7 (EGM) of parameter No. 15096.

If EGM = 0
If the system enters edge machining/start-up machining mode (a
code E201 to E205 is specified in the machining program),
power control mode is canceled.

If EGM = 1
Even if the system enters edge machining/start-up machining
mode, power control mode is not canceled. Power control is
stopped from the time of piercing at the corner edge until the
completion of travel for a return distance. While power control is
being stopped, the beam output conditions are controlled by edge
machining/start-up machining.

Signal
- Power control mode signal
PWCTL<G224#1>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Specifies a transition to or from power control mode.
[Operation] Transition to or from power control mode is carried out as follows:
Transition to power control mode = (G63 P1) OR (Power control
mode signal on)
The system is in power control mode while G63 P1,
specified in a machining program, is valid or while the
PMC holds the power control mode signal to 1.

- 209 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Return from power control mode = (G63 P0) AND (Power control
mode signal off)
When G63 P0 specified in a machining program is valid and
when the power control mode signal is set to 0, power
control mode is cancelled. The system usually enters the
G63 P0 state immediately after the CNC is activated or
upon a reset. If G63 P1 is not programmed, G63 P0 need
not be specified. That is, if the transition is made by an
external signal, the return is made by turning off that
external signal. If the transition is made by G63 P1
specified in a machining program, the return is made by
G63 P0.

The figure below shows the variations in power when the power
control mode signal is used (when only the power is controlled).

- Power control mode in progress signal

PCMD<F224#1>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies the PMC that the system has entered power control mode.
[Operation] This signal is output upon the completion of transition to power
control mode.

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0224 PWCTL
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0224 PCMD

- 210 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15000 FLT LPC
LPC 0: The power control function is disabled.
1: The power control function is enabled.
While this parameter is set to 0, the system cannot enter power control
mode. The G code and input signal specifying a transition to power
control mode are ignored.
FLT 0: The filter is disabled in power control mode.
1: The filter is enabled in power control mode.
When this parameter is set to 1, parameter No. 15094 becomes valid,
and the specified output can be delayed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15089 LP8 LP7 LP6 LP5 LP4 LPZ LPY LPX
LP* 0: The * axis is not used for feedrate calculation.
1: The * axis is used for feedrate calculation.
Based on the composite speed along the axes selected by this
parameter, the elements of the laser output are calculated. If no axis is
selected, the first axis (LPX) and second axis (LPY) are assumed.

15090 Minimum power

[Unit of data] W
[Valid data range] 0 to 7000
This parameter specifies the minimum power. If the power calculated
from the current feedrate is below the setting made with this parameter,
the power is limited to this setting.

15091 Minimum pulse frequency

[Unit of data] Hz
[Valid data range] 5 to 2000
This parameter specifies the minimum pulse frequency. If the
frequency calculated from the current feedrate is below the setting
made with this parameter, the frequency is limited to this setting.

15092 Minimum pulse duty ratio

[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
This parameter specifies the minimum pulse duty ratio. If the duty
ratio calculated from the current feedrate is less than the value set for
this parameter, the duty ratio is limited to this setting.

15094 Power control filter time constant

[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 8 to 32767
This parameter specifies the time constant of the first-order delay filter
for delaying and synchronizing the output to the machine feed.
The characteristic of the first-order delay filter is expressed as follows:
Ts
On = On－1 + ( In − On－1)
Tc
Ts : Always 8 milliseconds (sampling time)
Tc : Set by this parameter (time constant)

- 211 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

15095 Allowable variation in power control speed

[Unit of data] mm/min (command unit for B8F1-08 or earlier) or %
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
The feedrate used for calculation fluctuates slightly even in the steady
state. This parameter specifies the width of the dead zone for the
feedrate fluctuations in order to avoid unnecessary variations in values
(power, pulse frequency, and pulse duty ratio) resulting from these
changes in the feedrate.
This parameter is valid when parameter No. 15450 is 0.
To set a value of 256 or greater, use parameter No. 15450.
This parameter needs to be set as follows according to the setting of
bit 6 (SDB) of parameter No. 15096.
When SDB is 0, set a speed. Therefore, the allowable speed variation
is always the same value.
When SDB is 1, set the ratio (0 to 100%) to the specified speed when
a transition to power control mode is performed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15096 EGM SDB SQ0 PCD PCF PCP
PCP The power is:
0: Not controlled according to the feedrate.
1: Controlled according to the feedrate.
PCF The pulse frequency is:
0: Not controlled according to the feedrate.
1: Controlled according to the feedrate.
PCD The pulse duty ratio is:
0: Not controlled according to the feedrate.
1: Controlled according to the feedrate.
SQ0 When the specified peak power (S) or specified pulse duty ratio (Q) is
0:
0: The power control function is executed.
1: The power control function is interrupted.
SDB The allowable variation of the power control speed (parameter No.
15095) is set:
0: By directly setting a speed (mm/min).
1: By setting the ratio (0 to 100%) to the specified speed when a
transition to power control mode is performed.
EGM When the system is in edge machining mode or in start-up machining
mode:
0: Power control mode is canceled.
1: Power control is stopped during the piercing of edge machining
or start-up machining and during return distance movement.
The system is in edge machining mode or in start-up machining mode
when an E number for specifying edge machining or start-up
machining is selected.

- 212 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

Parameter for calculating the rate of change in output (Output when feedrate
15097 F is 0)
[Unit of data] W
[Valid data range] 0 to 7000
This parameter specifies the power when feedrate F is 0. The rate of
change in output is calculated from this setting and the programmed
output in power control mode Mc.

Parameter for calculating the rate of change in frequency (Frequency when

15098 feedrate F is 0)
[Unit of data] Hz
[Valid data range] 5 to 2000
This parameter specifies the frequency when feedrate F is 0. The rate
of change in frequency is calculated from this setting and the
programmed frequency in power control mode Mc.

Parameter for calculating the rate of change in the duty ratio (Duty ratio
15099 when feedrate F is 0)
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
This parameter specifies the duty ratio when the feedrate F of Mo is 0.
The rate of change in the duty ratio is calculated from this setting and
the programmed duty ratio in power control mode Mc.

15450 Allowable variation in power control speed (2)

[Unit of data] mm/min
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
When this parameter is 0, parameter No. 15095 is valid. The setting
range of this parameter is different from that of parameter No. 15095.
For details on the settings, see descriptions of parameter No. 15095.

NOTE
1 To use the laser power control function in
high-precision contour control (HPCC) mode,
select laser power control mode before selecting
high-precision contour control mode. To cancel
laser power control mode, do so after canceling
high-precision contour control mode.
2 The laser power control function cannot be used
together with the pulse enhanced function. In
power control mode, the pulse enhanced function
is disabled.
3 The laser power control function can be used only
for linear axes. The laser power control function
cannot be used with the cylindrical interpolation
function or other functions related to a rotation axis.
4 The laser power control function cannot be used
together with a function related to
three-dimensional machining.

- 213 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

8.8 LASER GAS MIXER FUNCTION

Overview
When a mixed laser gas is not available, the laser gas mixer function
is used to create a laser gas by mixing nitrogen, helium, and CO2 gases
in a predetermined proportion. A special laser gas mixer is necessary.
For details, read the manual provided with the laser gas mixer.

Mixture sequence
See the flowchart below.
(1) When the mixer is not connected, the conventional sequence is
used.
(2) RUN-ON starts the mixer operation.
(3) Check the levels of the CO2-gas, helium, and nitrogen cylinders.
If any level is too low, 111 is displayed on the diagnostic screen
(No. 987).
(4) The tank is evacuated if the previous operation stopped while the
tank was being supplied with gases. Otherwise, this step is
skipped.
(5) The previous operation stop status is checked. According to the
status, the gas supply is started. When the low-order bits of
parameter No. 15009 are 0000, tank A is supplied with gases,
mixes those gases, then starts supplying the mixed gas.
(6) After the mixed gas supply starts, the laser oscillator sequence
starts.
(7) If the previous operation was stopped while the tank was
preparing to supply gas, the gas supply starts immediately.
(8) First, the cylinder levels are checked. If any cylinder level is too
low, 111 is displayed on the diagnostic screen (No. 987). The
sequence remains stopped until the cylinder is replaced. When
the BCAN signal (G221#5) is set to 1 after the cylinder is
replaced, the gas supply starts. The tank in which the gas level is
low is supplied with the gases in a predetermined proportion.
(9) After the tank is filled with the gases, a wait time (of about 1
hour) is necessary to ensure a uniform mixture. Then, the tank is
switched.
(10) The gas level of the mixed gas tank is checked.
(11) If the gas level of the mixed gas tank is low, the tank is switched
to another tank.
(12) RUN-OFF stops the mixer. POWER-OFF should not be done
until the gas supply is completed. POWER-OFF during gas
supply may result in the gases being mixed in the wrong
proportion.

- 214 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

Turn NC on.

(1)
No
Is there a mixer?

Yes
Conventional sequence
No (2)
RUN-ON?

Yes
(3)
Cylinder level check
routine

(4)

Evacuation routine

(5)
Mixed gas supply start
routine

(6)

Oscillator sequence

- 215 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

(7) Was the

No
tank preparing for gas
supply?
Yes
(8)

② Gas supply routine

(9) No
Timeout?

Yes

(10) Is the No
mixed gas level low?

(11) Yes

Switch the tank.

(12)

Oscillator sequence

No
RUN-OFF?

Yes

Has the
No
oscillator purge
finished?
Yes

Is gas Yes
being supplied?

No

Send the purge

completion signal.

- 216 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

First activation after installation of mixer

Immediately after installation, the mixer state is not known. Therefore,
the mixer must be initialized. To discharge the internal gas, evacuation,
gas supply, mixing, and so on must be performed.
To perform this operation, set all the bits of parameter No. 15009 to 0.

Replacing a gas cylinder

After replacing a gas cylinder, hold the BCAN signal (G221#5) to 1
for about 500 milliseconds. This operation is necessary to inform the
NC that the cylinder has been replaced. After this operation, the mixer
automatically starts the following operation:
(1) Discharges air from the external gas piping between the cylinder
and the mixer.
This step is performed to prevent the gas from being mixed with
air.
(2) Resumes the operation from the wait state for requesting cylinder
replacement (due to low cylinder level).
When a low cylinder pressure is detected while the mixer is
being supplied with gases, 111 is displayed on the diagnostic
screen No.987. Only the mixer stops its operation temporarily. A
resume operation is necessary.

Leak check
To check the mixer for leaks, hold the LCAN signal (G221#4) to 1 for
about 500 milliseconds in the state before RUN-ON. The operation up
to evacuation sealing is performed automatically. The leak check
terminates by RUN-ON. An operator must check whether there is a
leak.

First activation after restoration of the NC

The entire mixer sequence is managed according to the flags specified
in parameter No. 15009. If the stored data is lost due to replacement of
the memory module or a memory clear operation, parameter No.
15009 must be reset, as is done after installation of the mixer,
described above.

Signal
- Leak check start signal
LCAN<G221#4>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Checks the mixer for leaks.

- Cylinder replacement signal

BCAN<G221#5>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Informs the NC that a cylinder has been replaced.

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G221 BCAN LCAN

- 217 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
15009 TME BCG BEM BS2 BS1 AS2 AS1
[Data type] Bit
AS2, AS 00: Tank A is being supplied with gases.
01: Tank A is mixing the gases.
10: Tank A is supplying the mixed gas.
11: Tank A is preparing for gas supply.
BS2, BS1 00: Tank B is being supplied with gases.
01: Tank B is mixing the gases.
10: Tank B is supplying the mixed gas.
11: Tank B is preparing for gas supply.
BEM 0: The supply pressure of the gas cylinder has fallen.
1: The supply pressure of the gas cylinder is normal.
BCG 0: The gas cylinder has been replaced.
1: The gas cylinder has not been replaced.
TEM 0: The supply pressure of the tank has fallen.
1: The supply pressure of the tank is normal.

15710 External piping (between cylinder and mixer) discharge time

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] sec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767

15711 Gas mixture wait time

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] min
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767

15712 Mixer evacuation time

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] min
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767

15713 Helium discharge time

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767

15714 Nitrogen/CO2 gas discharge time

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767

15715 Degree of vacuum of gas pressure

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] ( 1 = 13Pa )
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767

- 218 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

15716 Evacuation wait time

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] min
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767

Alarm and message

No. Message Contents
4136 High internal pressure The internal pressure of the mixer is too
high.
4137 Abnormal mixer power The power to the relay PCB in the mixer
is abnormal.
4138 Insufficient degree of vacuum The mixer does not reach a
predetermined degree of vacuum within
a predetermined evacuation time.
4139 Abnormal mixer pressure The supply pressure of the laser gas is
switch low, but the supply pressure of the tank
is not low.

CAUTION
For details of how to operate the laser gas mixer,
read the operator's manual provided with the laser
gas mixer.

- 219 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

8.9 REFLECTION BEAM MONITOR FUNCTION

Overview
When a highly reflective workpiece is laser-cut, the cutting face may
reflect the laser beam back to the laser resonator. Should this occur,
the cutting face and rear mirror form a false resonator, increasing the
laser power. The resultant laser beam may damage an optical
component.
To prevent such damage from occurring, the function monitors the
laser power. If the laser power exceeds a predetermined level, the
reflection beam is judged as returning to the resonator, and an alarm is
output.

Reflection beam monitoring

(1) If the laser power exceeds a specified value by a value greater
than or equal to the setting made with parameter No. 15265, an
alarm is raised.
(2) If the laser power is greater than or equal to the setting made with
parameter No. 15266, an alarm is raised.

Parameter

15265 Allowable output increase

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] W
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
If the difference between the specified value and the actual output is
greater than or equal to this value, an alarm is raised.

15266 Maximum output

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] W
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
If the actual output is greater than or equal to this value, an alarm is
raised.

Alarm and message

No. Message Contents
4168 Abnormal beam reflection The magnitude of the reflection beam
from the workpiece has reached a
predetermined level.

- 220 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

8.10 PULSE ENHANCED FUNCTION

Overview
If an overridden value of output power Pc exceeds a predetermined
value (parameter No. 15213), the pulse duty ratio is limited to 50% or
less.
The overridden value of output power Pc is limited to a predetermined
value (parameter No. 15210).
If the duty ratio is limited to 50%, the power value obtained after
power compensation and power feedback addition is limited to the
setting made with parameter No. 15207. If the duty ratio is not limited
to 50%, the power value is limited to the setting made with parameter
No. 15212.

Parameter

15212 Maximum power when the pulse duty ratio is not limited
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] W
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
When the pulse duty ratio is not limited to 50% according to the
setting made with parameter No. 15213, the power value obtained
after power compensation and power feedback addition cannot exceed
this value.

15213 Criterion for clamping the duty ratio

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] W
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
If an overridden value of the power Pc exceeds this setting, the pulse
duty ratio is limited to 50% or less, and the power value is limited to
the setting made with parameter No. 15210.

NOTE
When this function is not used, set identical values
in parameters No. 15210 and No. 15213 and in
parameters No. 15207 and No. 15212.

- 221 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

8.11 AI CONTOUR CONTROL

Overview
This function is intended for high-speed and high-precision machining.
The use of this function can hold down the delay due to
acceleration/deceleration and the delay in the servo system, which
increase as the feedrate increases, reducing the machining profile error.
This also enables linear acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead
interpolation with the look-ahead of up to 40 blocks, achieving
smooth acceleration/deceleration over multiple blocks and permitting
higher-speed machining.
This function is limited to two-dimensional commands.
The following functions are enabled in the AI contour control mode.
(1) Linear acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead interpolation
(look-ahead of up to 40 blocks)
(2) Automatic corner deceleration
(3) Feedrate clamp by acceleration
(4) Feedrate clamp by arc radius
(5) Block overlap (usually five blocks, up to 40 blocks depending on
the parameter setting)
(6) Advanced preview feed forward
For details of the above functions, see the descriptions of the
respective functions.

Specifications
Axis control
Name Function
Number of controlled axes 3 to 8
Number of simultaneous controlled Up to 6
axes
Axis name The three basic axes are fixed at X, Y,
and Z.
Other axes may be assigned any of U, V,
W, A, B, and C.
Least input increment 0.001 mm, 0.001 deg, 0.0001 inch

Interpolation functions ○: Specifiable ×: Not specifiable

Name Function
Positioning (G00) ○ (Linear interpolation type positioning)
Single direction positioning (G60) ×
Exact stop (G09) ○
Exact stop mode (G61) ○
Automatic corner override (G62) ×
Linear interpolation (G01) ○
Circular interpolation (G02, G03) ○ (Possible in multiple quadrants)

- 222 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

Name Function
Helical interpolation (G02, G03) ○ (Circular interpolation plus max. 2
axes linear interpolation)
If the helical interpolation option is
provided, linear interpolation can be
performed on up to two axes. The
specified feedrate must include the
speed on the helical axis.
Conical/spiral interpolation (G02, ×
G03)
Exponential interpolation (G02.3, ×
G03.3)
Dwell (G04) ○ (Specified in seconds.)
Polar coordinate interpolation ×
(G12.1, G13.1)
Cylindrical interpolation (G07.1) ×
Skip function (G31) ○ *
Reference position return (G28) ○ If the zero point is not established,
P/S alarm No. 090 is raised. *
Reference position return check ○ *
(G27)
Second, third, and fourth reference ○ *
position returns (G30)
Floating reference position return ○ *
(G30.1)
Normal direction control (G41.1, ×
G42.1)
Absolute command (G90)/ ○
incremental command (G91)

Feed functions ○: Specifiable ×: Not specifiable

Name Function
Rapid traverse rate 240 m/min (0.01 mm) max.
100 m/min (0.0001 mm) max.
Rapid traverse rate override F0, 25, 50, 100%
1% rapid traverse rate override 0 to 100 %
Feed per minute ○
Rapid traverse bell-shaped ×
acceleration/deceleration
Linear acceleration/deceleration ○ (Look-ahead of up to 40 blocks)
before cutting feed interpolation
Feedrate override 0 to 254 %
Second feedrate override ×
One-digit F code feed ×
Inverse time feed (G93) ×
External deceleration ○

Tool compensation functions ○: Specifiable ×: Not specifiable

Name Function
Cutter compensation C (G40, G41, ○
G42)

- 223 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Name Function
Tool length compensation (G43, ○
G44, G49)

Program input ○: Specifiable ×: Not specifiable

Name Function
Plane selection (G17, G18, G19) ○
Local coordinate system (G52) ○ *
Workpiece coordinate system ○ *
(G54-G59)
(G54.1Pxx)
Workpiece coordinate system ○ *
(G92)
Workpiece coordinate system ○ *
preset (G92.1)
Interruption type custom macro ×

Laser functions ○: Specifiable ×: Not specifiable

Name Function
Laser output command ○ G01S_P_Q_; is specifiable.
Piercing command (G24) ○ Including high-speed piercing.
Assist gas command (G32) ○
Z-axis tracing control (G13/G14) ○ If Z-axis tracing control is performed,
the Z-axis cannot be placed under AI
contour control.
Power control (G63) ○
Cutting condition setting function ○ E codes are specifiable. Neither
cutter compensation amounts or
feedrates can be specified.
Edge machine function, start-up ○
machining
Step function ×
Beam delay control ○ The delay amount is specified in a
separate parameter.
Retry processing function ×
Optical path length compensation ○ The mirror axis for optical path length
compensation cannot be placed
under AI contour control.
Buffer expansion ○
Interaction control ○
Attitude control A, B ○ Cannot be used together with helical
interpolation B.
3-dimentional conversion ×
(G98/G99)
3-dimentional coordinate system ×
conversion (G68/G69)
Spatial corner R insertion ×
(G33/G34)
Spatial circular interpolation (G12) ×
Proximity point search ×
Machining head A axis length ×
compensation function (G71)

- 224 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

Name Function
Program restart (laser ×
specifications)

Others ○: Specifiable ×: Not specifiable

Name Function
Cycle start / feed hold ○
Dry run ○
Single block ○
Interlock ○
Machine lock ○ If the machine lock signals for the
individual axes (MLK1 to MLK8) are
turned on/off, no
acceleration/deceleration is applied
to the axes for which the machine
lock has been applied.
Control in/control out command ( ) ○
Optional block skip command (/n:n ○
is a number)
Auxiliary function (Mxxxx) ○ Only function code signals and
function strobe signals are output.
Tool function (Txxxx) ○ Only function code signals and
function strobe signals are output.
Second auxiliary function (Bxxxx) ○ Only function code signals and
function strobe signals are output.
Simple synchronous control ○ It is not possible to switch between
synchronization and no
synchronization.
Program restart ×
Retrace function ×
Macro executor (execution macro) ×
MDI operation × If G05.1Q1 is specified in MDI mode,
P/S alarm No. 5113 is raised. In AI
contour control mode, it is not
possible to perform operation by
switching to MDI mode.
Manual intervention × If manual intervention is performed, it
is necessary to return the
coordinates to the position of
intervention at a restart. Otherwise,
P/S alarm No. 514 is raised.
* Look-ahead of multiple blocks is not performed.

Conditions for entering AI contour control mode

To specify G05.1Q1, the modal must be as given below. If these
conditions are not satisfied, P/S alarm No. 5111 is raised.

G code Meaning
G00 Positioning
G01 Linear interpolation
G02 Circular interpolation (CW)
G03 Circular interpolation (CCW)

- 225 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

G code Meaning
G13.1 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode
G15 Polar coordinate command cancel
G40 Cutter compensation cancel
G40.1 Normal direction control cancel mode
G49 Tool length compensation cancel
G50 Scaling cancel
G50.1 Programmable mirror image cancel
G64 Cutting mode
G67 Macro modal call cancel
G69 Coordinate rotation cancel

Linear acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead interpolation

This function can perform look-ahead of up to 40 blocks for a
feed-per-minute cutting feed command so that linear
acceleration/deceleration can be applied before interpolation, that is,
to the specified speed. With acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation, acceleration/deceleration is applied to interpolated data,
so that the interpolated data is changed. With acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation, on the other hand, acceleration/deceleration is
applied to the feedrate data before interpolation, so that interpolated
data is not changed by acceleration/deceleration. For this reason,
interpolated data may be applied to a specified straight line or curve at
any time to remove any machining profile error attributable to
acceleration/deceleration delay.

Linear acceleration/
deceleration before
interpolation

Specified Distributed
speed Acceleration/
Feedrate Interpolation pulses Servo
deceleration after
calculation calculation control
interpolation

Linear interpolation, circular interpolation, etc.

(Deceleration example)
During execution, to achieve the speed specified for one block,
deceleration starts in the previous block.
Speed
Point 1
Specified speed
F3 Speed after
acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation
Point 2

F2

F1
Time
N1 N1

- 226 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

To reduce the speed from speed F3 to speed F2, deceleration must

start at point 1.
To reduce the speed from speed F2 to speed F1, deceleration must
start at point 2.
Because look-ahead of up to 40 blocks can be performed, deceleration
can extend over several blocks.

(Acceleration example)
During execution, acceleration is performed so that the speed
specified for one block is achieved.
Speed
Specified speed
F3 Speed after
acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation

F2

F1
Time
N1 N2

Automatic corner deceleration

Using for reference the axis for which the ratio of the actual speed
difference to the permissible speed difference is the largest of the axes
for which the speed difference on each axis between blocks exceeds
the setting (parameter No. 1783), this function calculates the speed at
a corner as described below, and decelerates the tool to achieve that
speed at the block joint.
The speed changes on the respective axes (Vx, Vy, ...) during
movement at the specified speed F are compared with the settings of
parameter No. 1783 (Vprm-x, Vprm-y, ...). If the speed change on any
axis exceeds the corresponding parameter setting,
 Vx Vy 
Rmax = max
 Vprm − x , Vprm - y 、...
 
the speed (Fc) is determined as given below and deceleration is
performed at the corner.
1
where Fc＝F ×
Rmax
For example, assuming that the specified feedrate is 1000 mm/min and
the permissible speed difference (parameter No. 1783) is 500 mm/min,
deceleration is performed as shown in the next figure if the tool
movement direction changes by 90 degrees from X axis to Y axis.

- 227 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

N1 G01 G91 X100. F1000;

N2 Y100.;

N2
Tool path resulting from not
decelerating at the corner

Tool path resulting from

decelerating at the corner
N1

Speed If deceleration is not performed at the corner

If deceleration is performed at the corner
Feedrate on the X axis

F1000

F500

N1
Time

Speed
Feedrate on the Y axis

F1000

F500

N2
Time

Speed

F1000
Tangent feedrate

F500

N1 N2
Time

- 228 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

Feedrate clamp by acceleration

If consecutive, minute straight lines form a curve, as in the example
shown in the figure below, the speed difference on each axis between
corners is not very large. Deceleration by speed difference is not,
therefore, effective. Consecutive, small speed differences, however,
cause large acceleration on each axis as a whole.
In such a case, to hold down the shocks to the machine and machining
errors that can result from increases in acceleration, deceleration can
be performed. The speed to be attained by deceleration is such a
feedrate that the acceleration on each axis, which can be determined
with the formula shown below, does not exceed the permissible
acceleration established for all axes.
The permissible acceleration is established with the maximum cutting
feedrate (parameter No. 1432) and the time required to reach that
feedrate (parameter No. 1785).
Speed difference on that axis between corners

( )
Acceleration on Travel distance in Travel distance
=
each axis max the previous block in the next block
E , F

The deceleration speed is determined for each corner. Of the actual

feedrate, the deceleration speed determined at the start point of the
block, the deceleration speed determined at the end point, the smallest
one is assumed.
(Example)
In the following example, deceleration is performed at N2 to N4
and at N6 to N8, because acceleration/deceleration (inclination
of the dotted line in the speed graph) is large.

N8

N7
N9
N6

N5

N4
N1

N2 N3

- 229 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

N1 N5 N9 N1 N5 N9

Feedrate clamp by arc radius

To ensure that the acceleration in an arc block does not exceed the
permissible value, this function calculates the maximum permissible
speed v for an arc with the program-specified radius r, using the arc
radius R and the maximum permissible speed V (parameter setting)
for this radius, as described below. If the specified feedrate exceeds
the speed V, this function automatically clamps it to the speed v.
Assuming that
V2
Maximum permissible acceleration =
R

R: Arc radius V: Feedrate for the arc radius R

then, the maximum permissible speed v for an arc with the radius r can
be determined with the following formula:
v= r/R × V
The smaller the specified arc radius, the lower the maximum
permissible speed v. To prevent it from decreasing extremely, the
maximum permissible speed v can be set to the setting of parameter
No. 1732 (lower limit on the feedrate clamp by arc radius) when it
decreases below the setting of parameter No. 1732.

- 230 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

Rapid traverse
In rapid traverse, acceleration/deceleration is performed with
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation and travel is performed
with linear-type positioning. Either the linear or bell-shaped type can
be selected as the acceleration/deceleration type. The speed during
travel and the acceleration of acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation can be determined as follows:

(1) Speed during travel

Of the axes of travel, the lowest value as calculated with the
following formula is assumed the speed during travel.
Feedrate on each axis Travel distance of the block
×
(parameter No. 1420) Travel distance of each axis

(2) Acceleration of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

- For the linear type
Of the axes of travel, the lowest value as calculated with the
following formula is assumed the acceleration of linear
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation during travel.

Feedrate on each axis

Travel distance of the block
(parameter No. 1420)
×
Time constant for each axis
Travel distance of each axis
(parameter No. 1620)

- For the bell-shaped type

The speed determined from the acceleration described
above is multiplied by the time constant specified in
parameter No. 1621 (rapid traverse bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration time constant for each axis) for the
axis that yields the smallest value with the above formula.
Linear acceleration/deceleration
Speed Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration

ta: Depends on the linear acceleration.

tb: Bell-shaped time constant
tc: Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration
time
tc = ta + tb
ta is not constant, but varies with the rapid
traverse rate and rapid traverse time
constant for the specified axis.
tb is determined with the axis.

Time
tb tb tb tb

ta ta

tc tc

- 231 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Assuming that the speed during travel is F, the acceleration assumed

when linear acceleration/deceleration is used is A, and the bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration time constant is T, the time required for
acceleration/deceleration is:
Time required for acceleration/deceleration=F/A (linear type)
=F/A+T (bell-shaped type)
Speed

F/A: Time required for acceleration

when linear acceleration is used
T: Time for the rounded portion of
the corner

Time
T/2 F/A T/2

T T

NOTE
1 Rapid traverse block overlaps are disabled.
2 If bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is to be
used, the rapid traverse bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration option is required.

Signal
- AI contour control mode signal
AICC＜F062#0＞
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies that the system is in AI contour control mode.
[Output condition] The signal is set to "1" if:
- The system enters AI contour control mode.
The signal is set to "0" if:
- The system leaves AI contour control mode.

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F062 AICC

- 232 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

Parameter
- Parameters related to linear acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation

Maximum cutting speed during linear acceleration/deceleration before

1770 interpolation
[Data type] 2-word
[Unit of data] Valid data range
Input increment Unit of data
[Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 240000 6 to 100000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 9600 6 to 4800
Specify the maximum cutting speed during linear acceleration/
deceleration before interpolation.
(Parameter 1 for specifying the acceleration of linear acceleration/
deceleration before interpolation)

Time required to reach the maximum cutting speed during linear

1771 acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (time constant)
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] 1 msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
Specify the time (time constant) required to reach the speed specified
in parameter 1.
(Parameter 2 for specifying the acceleration of linear acceleration/
deceleration before interpolation)

NOTE
1 If either parameter No. 1770 or 1771 is set to 0, no
linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
is applied.
2 The setting of parameter No. 1770 divided by the
setting of parameter No. 1771 must be equal to or
greater than 5.

Speed
(mm/min)

Parameter
No. 1770

Parameter No. 1771 Time (msec)

Speed assumed when an overtravel alarm is raised during linear

1784 acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Valid data range
Input increment Unit of data
[Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800

- 233 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Specify the speed assumed when an overtravel alarm is raised during

linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.
If an overtravel alarm is raised during linear acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation, the tool decelerates and stops after the alarm is
raised, so that it overruns by the deceleration distance. The overrun
distance varies depending on the feedrate assumed when the
overtravel alarm is raised. The overrun distance can be reduced by
performing deceleration in advance to achieve the speed specified in
parameter No. 1784 when an overtravel alarm is raised. In this case,
deceleration may be completed sooner because deceleration is
performed so that the feedrate assumed when an overtravel alarm is
raised does not exceed the speed specified in the parameter. The
feedrate assumed after the completion of deceleration is equal to the
speed specified in the parameter.

NOTE
This parameter is not effective to rapid traverse
blocks.

Deceleration is performed if the following condition is satisfied:

Distance to the stored stroke Distance required for reduction from the
limit on each axis ＜ current speed (tangent feedrate) to the
speed of parameter No.1784

The overrun distance will be as follows:

2
  TOT T 
FIX F ×  + 1.5
Overrun distance ≦
  8  ×
F
1875 T
F: Maximum cutting speed during linear acceleration/
deceleration before interpolation (parameter No. 1770)
T: Time required to reach the maximum cutting speed during
linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
(parameter No. 1771)
FOT: Speed assumed when an overtravel alarm is raised during
linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
(parameter No. 1784)
FIX: Rounds the value down to the nearest whole number.

NOTE
1 If 0 is set, the above control is not performed.
2 When the stroke check is disabled, the above
control is also disabled.
3 The above control is effective to stored stroke
check 1 only.

- 234 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

- Parameter related to automatic corner deceleration

Permissible speed difference on each axis for the function for deceleration
1783 at corners by speed difference (for acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation)
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Valid data range
Input increment Unit of data
[Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Specify the speed difference on each axis for the function for
automatic deceleration at corners by speed difference when linear
acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation is used.

- Parameter related to the feedrate clamp by acceleration

Parameter for determining the permissible acceleration in speed clamp by

1785 acceleration
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] 1 msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
To determine the permissible acceleration used to perform speed
clamp by acceleration, specify the time required to reach the
maximum cutting feedrate.
The maximum cutting feedrate and the setting of this parameter are
used to determine the permissible acceleration. Parameter No. 1432
(maximum cutting feedrate in AI contour control mode) is used as the
maximum cutting feedrate parameter.

Speed
(mm/min)
Permissible acceleration

Parameter
No. 1432

Parameter No. 1785 Time (msec)

- Parameters related to feedrate clamp by arc radius

1731 Arc radius corresponding to the upper feedrate limit

[Data type] 2-word
[Unit of data] Input increment IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 min
Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
[Valid data range] 1000 to 99999999
Specify the arc radius corresponding to the upper feedrate limit
specified in parameter No. 1730.

- 235 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

1730 Upper feedrate limit at the arc radius R

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Valid data range
Input increment Unit of data
[Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 8 to 15000 0 to 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 8 to 6000 0 to 4800
Specify the upper feedrate limit at the arc radius specified in
parameter No. 1731.
(Example) Specified speed

N1 a
N2

b
r
a b
N3
N1 N2 N3 Time

1732 Lower limit RVmin on feedrate clamp by arc radius

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Valid data range
Input increment Unit of data
[Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 8 to 15000 0 to 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 8 to 6000 0 to 4800
With the "feedrate clamp by arc radius" function, the smaller the arc
radius, the lower the upper feedrate limit. If the upper feedrate limit is
lower than the lower limit RVmin on the feedrate clamp by arc radius,
the upper feedrate limit is set to RVmin.

- Other parameters

1422 Upper speed limit for cutting feed in AI contour control

[Data type] 2-word
[Unit of data] Valid data range
Input increment Unit of data
[Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 240000 6 to 100000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 96000 6 to 48000
Specify the upper speed limit for cutting feed in AI contour control
mode.

1432 Maximum cutting feedrate in AI contour control mode (each axis)

[Data type] 2-word
[Unit of data] Valid data range
Input increment Unit of data
[Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 0 to 240000 0 to 100000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 0 to 96000 0 to 48000
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 0 to 240000 0 to 100000
Specify the maximum cutting feedrate on each axis in AI contour
control mode.

- 236 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1603 RBL
[Data type] Bit
RBL In AI contour control mode, rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration
is:
0: Linear acceleration/deceleration.
1: Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration.

Rapid traverse bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant for each

1621 axis
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] 1 msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 512

Specify tb, shown in the figure below, for each axis. If the setting is 0,
linear acceleration/deceleration is assumed.

Linear acceleration/deceleration
Speed Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration

ta: Depends on the linear acceleration.

tb: Bell-shaped time constant

Time
tb tb tb tb

ta ta

7061 Number of block overlaps

[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] Blocks
[Valid data range] 0 to 40
To overlap multiple blocks, specify the maximum number of block
overlaps. If the setting is 0, 5 fives are assumed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7050 MI1 MI0
[Data type] Bit
MI1、MI0 Set the following values:
MI1 MI0
Setting 0 1

- 237 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7052 NMI
[Data type] Bit axis
For a PMC controlled axis, tracing control axis, or optical path length
compensation mirror axis, set this bit to 1.

- Parameter numbers used in normal mode, advanced preview control mode, and
AI contour control mode

(Parameters related to linear acceleration/deceleration before

interpolation)
Parameter number
Parameter Advanced
AI
Normal preview
control contour
Acceleration/deceleration type (type A/B) FWB/1602#0 None
Parameter 1 for specifying
1630 1770
acceleration/deceleration
Parameter 2 for specifying
1631 1771
acceleration/deceleration
Speed assumed if on overtravel alarm is
1784
raised

(Parameters related to automatic corner deceleration)

Parameter number
Parameter Advanced
AI
Normal preview
control contour
Automatic corner deceleration judgment
CSD/1602#4 None
method (angle/speed difference)
Lower speed limit (control by angle) 1778 1777 None
Judgment angle (control by angle) 1740 1779 None
Permissible speed difference for all axes
1780 None
(control by speed difference)
Permissible speed difference for each axis
1783
(control by speed difference)

(Parameter related to speed clamp by acceleration)

Parameter number
Parameter Advanced
AI
Normal preview
control contour
Parameter for determining permissible
None 1785
acceleration

(Parameters related to speed clamp by arc radius)

Parameter number
Parameter Advanced
AI
Normal preview
control contour
Arc radius for the upper feedrate limit 1731
Upper feedrate limit at the arc radius R 1730
Lower clamp speed limit 1732

- 238 -
B-64663EN/01 LASER FUNCTION 8.CONTROL FUNCTION

(Others)
Parameter number
Parameter Advanced
AI
Normal preview
control contour
Radius error precision in circular
PCIRI/3403#0 None
interpolation
Maximum cutting federate (common to all
1422 1431 1422
axes)
Maximum cutting feedrate (for each axis) 1430 1432
Rapid traverse bell-shaped RBL/1603#6
1621
acceleration/deceleration time constant 1621

Alarm and message

No. Message Description
5110 IMPROPER G-CODE An un-specifiable G code is specified in
(G05.1 G1 MODE) AI contour control mode.
5111 IMPROPER MODAL When AI contour control mode is
G-CODE specified, an unusable G code is
(G05.1 G1) modal.
5112 G08 CAN NOT BE In AI contour control mode, the
COMMANDED advanced preview control command
(G05.1 G1) (G08) is specified.
5113 CAN NOT ERROR IN MDI In MDI mode, the AI contour control
MODE command (G05.1) is specified.
(G05.1)
5114 NOT STOP POSITION At a restart after manual intervention,
(G05.1 Q1) the coordinates have not returned to
the stop position.
5156 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION In AI contour control mode, the
(AICC) controlled axis select signal (PMC axis
control) changed.
In AI contour control mode, the simple
synchronous axis selection signal
changed.
5157 FEEDRATE 0 (AICC) The maximum cutting feedrate
parameter (No. 1422 or 1532) is set to
0.
The parameter for
acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation (No. 1770 or 1771) is set
to 0.

- 239 -
8.CONTROL FUNCTION LASER FUNCTION B-64663EN/01

Cautions
CAUTION
1 If the total distance of the advanced preview blocks
decreases below the deceleration distance from
the current speed, deceleration starts. If, at the end
of deceleration, advanced preview has proceeded,
increasing the total distance of blocks, acceleration
is performed again. If blocks, especially those with
small travel distances, are specified in succession,
the speed may not become constant because
deceleration and acceleration are performed
alternately. If this occurs, decrease the specified
speed.
2 If, during axial movement, the dry run signal
changes from "0" to "1" or from "1" to "0,"
acceleration/deceleration is performed to the
predetermined speed without deceleration to speed
0.
3 If, in AI contour control mode, there is a block
without movement or a 1-shot G code command
such as G04, the tool decelerates and stops
temporarily in the previous block.

Notes
TE
1 Acceleration before interpolation used must be of
the linear or bell-shaped type. Exponential
acceleration/deceleration cannot be used.
2 During switching to AI contour control mode,
manual handle interrupts are disabled.
3 This function is limited to X-Y plan machining.
It cannot be used together with cylindrical
interpolation, normal direction control,
three-dimensional machining function, etc.

Reference item
Series Operator's Manual II.19.6 AI contour control
16i/160i/18i/180i (B-63524EN)
FANUC Series Operator's Manual II.16.7
16i/160i-LB (B-63664EN)

- 240 -
APPENDIX
B-64663EN/01 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC (FOR C SERIES AND Y SERIES LASER)

A INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

(FOR C SERIES AND Y SERIES LASER)

- 243 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC (FOR C SERIES AND Y SERIES LASER) APPENDIX B-64663EN/01

A.1 LIST OF ADDRESSES

Interface addresses among CNC, PMC and Machine Tool are as

follows:
(1) Standard signals
Refer to the FANUC Series 16i/160i-MODEL B Connection
Manual (B-63523EN-1).
(2) FS16i-LB-specific signals

PMC→CNC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G007 RVS

G220 *DU16 *DU8 *DU4 *DU2 *DU1

G221 AGRDY CLRDY BCAN LCAN PTE PTS

G222 HVON RUN AGST BEMON SHTON SCLON *BEMLC *SHTLC

G223 PVO7 POV6 POV5 POV4 POV3 POV2 POV1 POV0

G224 OTPMX2 PWCTL LRCS

G225 GAPG2 GAPG1 GAPG0 TCST TRCKM ZAPR ZTRM

G226 RVSLSR TBES HNDCD ALNAXS REST2 NRSRH

G227 TRMLK *TRIL

G228 *FOV7 *FOV6 *FOV5 *FOV4 *FOV3 *FOV2 *FOV1 *FOV0

G229 *AOV7 *AOV6 *AOV5 *AOV4 *AOV3 *AOV2 *AOV1 *AOV0

- 244 -
B-64663EN/01 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC (FOR C SERIES AND Y SERIES LASER)

CNC→PMC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F082 RVSL

F220 TRALM MWRN WKP SHTONL SHTOFL TRCL AGSLT TRERS

F221 BEAM LSTR RFHV CLON WAIT PURGE LRDY LARM

F222 PIRC CW PULSE LPRC AG3 AG2 AG1

F223 LONC CSTP LCIN

F224 PCMD

F225 RVSG08 RVSERR RVSSKE LNSR RVSARV

F226

F227

F228

F229

- 245 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC (FOR C SERIES AND Y SERIES LASER) APPENDIX B-64663EN/01

A.2 LIST OF SIGNALS

A.2.1 List of Signals (In Order of Functions)

Function Signal name Symbol Address Item

Assist gas pressure override Assist gas pressure override signals *AOV0 to *AOV7 G229 4.3
Assist gas control Assist gas ready signal AGRDY G221#7 4.1
Assist gas start signal AGST G225#5
Assist gas selection signal AGSLT F220#1
Machining pressure signal WKP F220#5
Assist gas select signals AG1 to AG3 F222#0 to #2
Approach feed Approach feed function ZAPR G225#1 7.5
Retry processing function Retracee signal RVS G007#0 8.6
Retry processing mode selection RVSLSR G226#7
signal
Retrace-in-progress signal RVSL F082#2
Retrace completion signal RVSARV F225#0
Skip completion signal RVSSKE F225#2
Machining condition impossible signal RVSERR F225#3
Advanced preview control resume RVSG08 F225#4
signal
Guide light on Guide light on signal SCLON G222#2 5.5
Proximity point search Proximity point search signal NRSRH G226#0 7.6
function Proximity point search progress signal LNSR F225#1
Optical path length Optical path length compensation LRCS G224#0 8.1
compensation start signal
Optical path length compensation LCIN F223#0
signal
Optical path length compensation stop CSTP F223#1
request signal
Attitude control Attitude control mode select signal ALNAXS G226#2 7.1.2
Attitude control B speed clamp select OTPMX2 G224#7
signal
Shutter open/lock control Shutter lock signal *SHTLC G222#0 5.1
Shutter open signal SHTON G222#3
Shutter ON/OFF signals SHTONL F224#4
SHTOFL F224#3
Output override Power override signals POV0 to POV7 G223 5.3
Frequency override signals *FOV0 to *FOV7 G228
Duty override signals *DU1 to *DU16 G220#0 to #4
State output signal Piercing signal PIRC F222#7 5.6
Laser processing signal LPRC F222#4
Output drop alarm signal MWRN F220#6
Laser alarm signal LARM F221#0
Laser oscillator not connected signal LONC F223#7
Teaching box interface Teaching box exclusive right signal TBES G226#6 7.2
Tracing axis switching Tracing axis switching signal ZTRM G225#0 7.4

- 246 -
B-64663EN/01 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC (FOR C SERIES AND Y SERIES LASER)

Function Signal name Symbol Address Item

Tracing function Tracing start signal TCST G225#3 6.1.1
Tracing motion signal TRCL F220#2
Tracing alarm signal TRALM F220#7 6.1.5
Trace check mode signal TRCKM G225#2
Tracing not avairable signal TRERS F220#0
Tracing gain override signals GAPG0 to G225#4 to #6 6.1.6
GAPG2
Tracing interlock signal *TRIL G227#6 6.2
Tracing axis machine lock signal TRMLK G227#7 6.3
Power control function Power control mode signal PWCTL G224#1 8.7
Power control mode in progress signal PCMD F224#1
Manual operation in hand Hand coordinate system mode select HNDCD G226#3 7.7
coordinate system signal
Piercing time external Piercing time reduction signal PTS G221#2 5.4
alteration function Piercing time extension signal PTE G221#3
Beam on/off control Beam on signal BEMON G222#4 5.2
Beam lock signal *BEMLC G222#1
Beam output signal BEAM F221#7
Mode output signals CW F222#6
PULSE F222#5
Program restart Program restart signal REST2 G226#1 2.4
Proximity point search progress signal LNSR F225#1
Laser gas mixer function Leak check start signal LCAN G221#4 8.8
Cylinder replacement signal BCAN G221#5
Laser sequence control Purge completion signal PURGE F221#2 3
Oscillator start signal RUN G222#6
Oscillator ready signal WAIT F221#3
Chiller start request signal CLON F221#4
Chiller ready signa CLRDY G221#6
Discharge start ready signal LRDY F221#1
Discharge start signal HVON G222#7
Reference discharge start signal RFHV F221#5
Oscillator signal LSTR F221#6

- 247 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC (FOR C SERIES AND Y SERIES LASER) APPENDIX B-64663EN/01

A.2.2 List of Signals (In Order of Symbols)

Group Symbol Signal name Address Item

* *AOV0 to *AOV7 Assist gas pressure override signals G229 4.3
*BEMLC Beam lock signal G222#1 5.2
*DU1 to *DU16 Duty override signals G220#0 to #4 5.3
*FOV0 to *FOV7 Frequency override signals G228 5.3
*SHTLC Shutter lock signal G222#0 5.1
*TRIL Tracing interlock signal G227#6 6.2
A AG1 to AG3 Assist gas select signals F222#0 to #2 4.1
AGRDY Assist gas ready signal G221#7
AGSLT Assist gas selection signal F220#1
AGST Assist gas start signal G225#5
ALNAXS Attitude control mode select signal G226#2 7.1.2
B BCAN Cylinder replacement signal G221#5 8.8
BEAM Beam output signal F221#7 5.2
BEMON Beam on signal G222#4
C CLON Chiller start request signal F221#4 3
CLRDY Chiller ready signa G221#6
CSTP Optical path length compensation stop request F223#1 8.1
signal
CW Mode output signals F222#6 5.1
G GAPG0 to GAPG2 Tracing gain override signals G225#4 to #6 6.1.6
H HNDCD Hand coordinate system mode select signal G226#3 7.7
HVON Discharge start signal G222#7 3
L LARM Laser alarm signal F221#0 5.6
LCAN Leak check start signal G221#4 8.8
LCIN Optical path length compensation signal F223#0 8.1
LNSR Proximity point search progress signal F225#1 7.6
LONC Laser oscillator not connected signal F223#7 5.6
LPRC Laser processing signal F222#4
LRCS Optical path length compensation start signal G224#0 8.1
LRDY Discharge start ready signal F221#1 3
LSTR Oscillator signal F221#6
M MWRN Output drop alarm signal F220#6 5.6
N NRSRH Proximity point search signal G226#0 7.6
O OTPMX2 Attitude control B speed clamp select signal G224#7 7.1.2
P PCMD Power control mode in progress signal F224#1 8.7
PIRC Piercing signal F222#7 5.6
POV0 to POV7 Power override signals G223 5.3
PTE Piercing time extension signal G221#3 5.4
PTS Piercing time reduction signal G221#2
PULSE Mode output signals F222#5 5.2
PURGE Purge completion signal F221#2 3
PWCTL Power control mode signal G224#1 8.7

- 248 -
B-64663EN/01 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC (FOR C SERIES AND Y SERIES LASER)

Group Symbol Signal name Address Item

R REST2 Program restart signal G226#1 2.4
RFHV Reference discharge start signal F221#5 3
RUN Oscillator start signal G222#6
RVS Retrace signal G007#0 8.6
RVSARV Retrace completion signal F225#0
RVSERR Machining condition impossible signal F225#3
RVSG08 Advanced preview control resume signal F225#4
RVSL Retrace-in-progress signal F082#2
RVSLSR Retry processing function mode selection G226#7
signal
RVSSKE Skip completion signal F225#2 8
S SCLON Guide light on signal G222#2 5.5
SHTOFL Shutter ON/OFF signals F224#3 5.1
SHTONL F224#4
SHTON Shutter open signal G222#3
T TBES Teaching box exclusive right signal G226#6 7.2
TCST Tracing start signal G225#3 6.1.1
TRALM Tracing alarm signal F220#7
TRCKM Trace check mode signal G225#2 6.1.5
TRCL Tracing motion signal F220#2 6.1.1
TRERS Tracing not avairable signal F220#0 6.1.5
TRMLK Tracing axis machine lock signal G227#7 6.3
W WAIT Oscillator ready signal F221#3 3
WKP Machining pressure signal F220#5 4.1
Z ZAPR Approach feed function G225#1 7.5
ZTRM Tracing axis switching signal G225#0 7.4

- 249 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC (FOR C SERIES AND Y SERIES LASER) APPENDIX B-64663EN/01

A.2.3 List of Signals (In Order of Addresses)

Addresses Signal name Symbol Item

G007#0 Retrace signal RVS 8.6
G220#0 to #4 Duty override signals *DU1 to *DU16 5.3
G221#2 Piercing time reduction signal PTS 5.4
G221#3 Piercing time extension signal PTE
G221#4 Leak check start signal LCAN 8.8
G221#5 Cylinder replacement signal BCAN
G221#6 Chiller ready signa CLRDY 3
G221#7 Assist gas ready signal AGRDY 4.1
G222#0 Shutter lock signal *SHTLC 5.1
G222#1 Beam lock signal *BEMLC 5.2
G222#2 Guide light on signal SCLON 5.5
G222#3 Shutter open signal SHTON 5.1
G222#4 Beam on signal BEMON 5.2
G222#5 Assist gas start signal AGST 4.1
G222#6 Oscillator start signal RUN 3
G222#7 Discharge start signal HVON
G223 Power override signals POV0 to POV7 5.3
G224#0 Optical path length compensation start signal LRCS 8.1
G224#1 Power control mode signal PWCTL 8.7
G224#7 Attitude control B speed clamp select signal OTPMX2 7.1.2
G225#0 Tracing axis switching signal ZTRM 7.4
G225#1 Approach feed function ZAPR 7.5
G225#2 Trace check mode signal TRCKM 6.1.5
G225#3 Tracing start signal TCST 6.1.1
G225#4 to #6 Tracing gain override signals GAPG0 to GAPG2 6.1.6
G226#0 Proximity point search signal NRSRH 7.6
G226#1 Program restart signal REST2 2.4
G226#2 Attitude control mode select signal ALNAXS 7.1.2
G226#3 Hand coordinate system mode select signal HNDCD 7.7
G226#6 Teaching box exclusive right signal TBES 7.2
G226#7 Retry processing function mode selection signal RVSLSR 8.6
G227#6 Tracing interlock signal *TRIL 6.2
G227#7 Tracing axis interlock signal TRMLK 6.3
G228 Frequency override signals *FOV0 to *FOV7 5.3
G229 Assist gas pressure override signals *AOV0 to *AOV7 4.3
F082#2 Retrace-in-progress signal RVSL 8.6
F220#0 Tracing not avairable signal TRERS 6.1.5
F220#1 Assist gas selection signal AGSLT 4.1
F220#2 Tracing motion signal TRCL 6.1.1
F224#3 Shutter ON/OFF signals SHTOFL 5.1
F224#4 SHTONL
F220#5 Machining pressure signal WKP 4.1
F220#6 Output drop alarm signal MWRN 5.6
F220#7 Tracing alarm signal TRALM 6.1.1
F221#0 Laser alarm signal LARM 5.6
F221#1 Discharge start ready signal LRDY 3
F221#2 Purge completion signal PURGE
F221#3 Oscillator ready signal WAIT
F221#4 Chiller start request signal CLON

- 250 -
B-64663EN/01 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC (FOR C SERIES AND Y SERIES LASER)

Addresses Signal name Symbol Item

F221#5 Reference discharge start signal RFHV 3
F221#6 Oscillator signal LSTR
F221#7 Beam output signal BEAM 5.2
F222#0 to #2 Assist gas select signals AG1 to AG3 4.1
F222#4 Laser processing signal LPRC 5.6
F222#5 Mode output signals PULSE 5.2
F222#6 Mode output signals CW 5.1
F222#7 Piercing signal PIRC 5.6
F223#0 Optical path length compensation signal LCIN 8.1
F223#1 Optical path length compensation stop request signal CSTP 8.1
F223#7 Laser oscillator not connected signal LONC 5.6
F224#1 Power control mode in progress signal PCMD 8.7
F225#0 Retrace completion signal RVSARV 8.6
F225#1 Proximity point search progress signal LNSR 7.6
F225#2 Skip completion signal RVSSKE 8.6
F225#3 Machining condition impossible signal RVSERR
F225#4 Advanced preview control resume signal RVSG08

- 251 -
B-63663EN/01 INDEX

INDEX
FUNCTIONS ..................................................................29
<A>
FUNCTIONS DIFFERING FROM THE M SERIES
AI CONTOUR CONTROL........................................... 222
SPECIFICATIONS .........................................................38
Approach......................................................................... 97
APPROACH FEED....................................................... 155 <G>
ASSIST GAS .................................................................. 54 GUIDE LIGHT ON SIGNAL .........................................80
ASSIST GAS CONTROL............................................... 55
<I>
ASSIST GAS PRESSURE ANALOG OUTPUT...... 24, 63
I/O LIMITATION BASED ON LASER OSCILLATOR
ASSIST GAS PRESSURE OVERRIDE ......................... 65
CONNECTION...............................................................18
ATTITUDE CONTROL ............................................... 107
INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC (FOR C
Attitude Control A (Zero-offset Head).......................... 108
SERIES AND Y SERIES LASER) ...............................243
Attitude Control B (Offset Nozzle) ............................... 112
<L>
<B>
Laser Alarm Signal..........................................................84
BEAM ON/OFF CONTROL .......................................... 70
LASER GAS MIXER FUNCTION ..............................214
<C> LASER OSCILLATOR ..................................................19
CHANGING THE PIERCING TIME............................. 77 LASER OSCILLATOR CONNECTION USING AN
CONFIGURATION ..........................................................5 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE..............................................22
CONFIGURATION OF THE CONTROL UNIT .............7 Laser Oscillator Not Connected Signal ...........................85
Connection of the CP1A ................................................. 21 LASER OUTPUT CONTROL........................................66
CONNECTION OF THE LASER OSCILLATOR ......... 20 LASER POWER CONTROL........................................207
CONNECTION OF THE TRACING SENSOR ............. 26 Laser Processing Signal ..................................................82
CONTROL FUNCTION............................................... 164 LASER SEQUENCE CONTROL...................................45
CONTROL UNIT .............................................................6 LIST OF ADDRESSES.................................................244
CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY............................. 16 LIST OF SIGNALS ......................................................246
CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN LASER SERIES List of Signals (In Order of Addresses).........................250
AND SOFTWARE SERIES .............................................4 List of Signals (In Order of Functions) .........................246
List of Signals (In Order of Symbols) ...........................248
<D>
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND <M>
NOTE............................................................................. s-1 Machine Lock..................................................................40
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN Series 16i-LB AND MACHINING CONDITION SETTING FUNCTION ..172
Series 16i...........................................................................4 MANUAL OPERATION IN HAND COORDINATE
Dry Run........................................................................... 40 SYSTEM .......................................................................161
Duty Override ................................................................. 76
<O>
<E> OPTICAL PATH LENGTH COMPENSATION..........165
EDGE MACHINE FUNCTION.................................... 185 Output Drop Alarm Signal ..............................................83
EMERGENCY STOP ..................................................... 39 OUTPUT OVERRIDE ....................................................74

<F> <P>
FEED HOLD................................................................... 39 PIERCING FUNCTION ...............................................182
FOR C SERIES AND Y SERIES OSCILLATORS........ 10 Piercing Signal ................................................................81
Frequency Override Signal.............................................. 75

i-1
INDEX B-63663EN/01

POWER CAPACITY AND HEATING VALUE OF

THE ANALOG INPUT BOARD.................................... 17
Power Override Signal .................................................... 74
POWER SUPPLY ........................................................... 15
PREFACE ......................................................................p-1
PROGRAM RESTART (LASER SPECIFICATIONS) .. 42
PROXIMITY POINT SEARCH FUNCTION .............. 156
PULSE ENHANCED FUNCTION............................... 221

<R>
REFLECTION BEAM MONITOR FUNCTION.......... 220
RETRY PROCESSING FUNCTION ........................... 194

<S>
SEQUENCE CONTROL OF THE C SERIES AND Y
SERIES LASER OSCILLATORS .................................. 46
SHUTTER OPENING/CLOSING CONTROL............... 67
Single Block.................................................................... 41
Standard Shift.................................................................. 95
START-UP FUNCTION............................................... 191
STATE OUTPUT SIGNAL ............................................ 81

<T>
TEACHING BOX INTERFACE .................................. 124
TEST OPERATION........................................................ 40
THREE-DIMENSIONAL MACHINING SYSTEM .... 106
TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM ...............................9
Tracing Alarm ................................................................. 99
TRACING AXIS MACHINE LOCK............................ 105
TRACING AXIS SWITCHING.................................... 154
TRACING CONTROL ............................................. 86, 87
Tracing Control Adjustment............................................ 91
Tracing Function ............................................................. 87
Tracing Gain Override .................................................. 102
TRACING INTERLOCK SIGNAL .............................. 103

<W>
W-AXIS TRACING...................................................... 151

i-2
 Revision Record

FANUC Series 16i/160i-LB CONNECTION MANUAL (B-63663EN)

01 Jul., 2005

Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents